Home

Partner Plus R4 Installation Programming and Use

1. NUMBER OF LINES See IMPORTANT below DIAL 104 DIAL two digits 01 1 2 for the number of outside lines to be assigned to every extension V 2 per 206 module V 4 per 400 module V TRANSFER RETURN RINGS DIAL 105 p 5 141 DIAL one digit 0 9 for the number of rings before the call returns v 4 rings 0 rings no return V RECALL TIMER DURATION DIAL 107 p 5 116 DIAL two digits 01 80 to set the length of a switchhook flash V 18 450 msec p 5 104 ROTARY DIALING TIMEOUT DIAL 108 p 5 117 DIAL 1 4sec 2 8sec v 3 12 sec OUTSIDE CONFERENCE DENIAL DIAL 109 p 5 109 DIAL 1 Allowed v 2 Disallowed v OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION BUTTON p 5 107 DIAL 114 xk DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select Button then press a programmable button WAKE UP SERVICE BUTTON p 5 151 DIAL 115 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a programmable button V VMS COVER RINGS DIAL 117 p 5 144 DIAL one digit 1 9 for the number of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging system v 3rings IMPORTANT The Number of Lines procedure changes line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 DIAL MODE DIAL 201
2. m Manual Signaling A Manual Signaling button labeled MS Bill is programmed to signal the target extension When the button is pressed the user at the target extension will hear a tone for as long as the button is pressed This feature is typically used by a receptionist to alert the boss of an important incoming call when the boss is already on a call The lights of a Manual Signaling button work like an Auto Dial button to show the status of the target extension Additionally a Manual Signaling button can be used to place intercom calls Manual Signaling applies only to system phones Ec Euren Chapter 5 for more information NOTE You can have only one button for a target extension per extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button for intercom ringing or voice signaling m Fax Management A button labeled Fax 29 is programmed as a Fax Management button for the fax machine connected to extension 29 The lights next to the button show what is happening at the fax machine for example red broken flutter indicates that the fax machine is not responding for example when it is out of paper For more information see Fax Management Feature in Chapter 4 2 18 Programming m 5 3 m 5 S a Est 11 Ext 12 Est 13 u n o o MLS 34D B B n a o o Phone bee 7 pex 78 p es 19 n s 20 p Ent 2 pest 22 E atl pe ex RARE oL aen 23 pA 24 m 2
3. 4ii Using Auxiliary Equipment Overview There are many ways to set up auxiliary equipment the setup you choose depends upon your needs and the number of devices you have This chapter presents some common setups It does not cover how to physically connect the equipment or how to program the features See the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide for installation instructions Chapter 5 for programming instructions and the equipment manufacturers documentation for complete details on the device you connect This chapter shows various applications for the following types of equipment Modems Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 1 In addition you can connect the following devices to your system m Doorphones allow visitors to signal extensions by pressing a button on the doorphone the person who answers a doorphone call can then speak with the visitor at the doorphone A doorphone is especially useful for providing access to offices or departments after hours For example you can install a doorphone outside your building entrance to allow visitors to ring telephones inside the building when the receptionist is not there and the front door is locked The system supports up to two AT amp T PARTNER Doorphones or any number of AT amp T Universal Doorphones Universal Doorphones offer a door unlock feature and can be installed in addition to PARTNER Doorphones m Loudspeaker paging systems a
4. B 6 Maintenance To use Table B 1 first locate the item you want A triangle A indicates where you can obtain it SOURCE U S AT amp T AT amp T AT amp T AT amp T AT amp T Catalog Sales PhoneCenter Authorized National Parts Sales Office Store Dealer Sales Center 800 451 2100 800 247 7000 800 222 7278 System Telephones and Accessories MLS 34D corded telephone black or white MLS 18D corded telephone black or white MLS 12D corded telephone black or white MLS 12 corded telephone black or white Telephone stand black or white specify telephone model Button label package specify telephone model Programming overlay for MLS 34D and or MLS 18D MLS 12D ok Power unit for MLS CA24 Intercom Autodialer oa Handset K2S1 black or white Standard for MLS model phones Amplified handset K6S black or white Optional for hard of hearing users with MLS model phones Handset cord 9 ft black or white coiled Connects handset to telephone Telephone mounting cord D4BU Connects phone to wall jack jack panel or 206E or EC module ext jack Specify length 2 7 or 14 ft Modular telephone extension cord 8 connector Extends the D4BU mounting cords Specify length 14 25 50 75 or 100 ft To locate the AT amp T PhoneCenter Store nearest you see the listing in your local telephone directory s white pages under AT amp T or call 1 800 222 3111 in the continental U S only To locate th
5. Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to change the current Outgoing Call Restriction setting for an extension This button is useful for quickly changing an extension s restriction For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of the room phone from No Restriction to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out Conversely a receptionist can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of a conference room phone from Local Only which prevents users from making long distance calls to No Restriction so a client can dial long distance Related Features m Rather than using an Outgoing Call Restriction button you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting through System Programming if you prefer m You must use an Auto Dial button with lights to designate the extension you want to change after you press the Outgoing Call Restriction button It is recommended that you use an Auto Dial button on the MLS CA24 Intercom Autodialer However you can use an intercom Auto Dial button on the system phone at extension 10 provided it has lights For information about programming Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing Considerations m An Outgoing Call Restriction button mus
6. Press Feature 0 0 to exit programming mode System Speed Dial Numbers 5 131 Using System Phone You can lift the handset or press Spkr before dialing 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press Intercom 8 and the two digit line number 2 Press Feature 3 Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 If you did not specify an outside line the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display phone unless it is a marked System Speed Dial number Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press 4 Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number 5 132 System Speed Dial Numbers System Time 103 Description This System Programming procedure sets the time that appears on system display phones Considerations m Enter the time in 24 hour notation In this scheme the hours of the day are 0000 12 midnight to 2359 11 59 p m Since each time must have four digits use leading zeros when necessary For example to set the time to 9 00 a m enter 0 2 0o 0 For 4 45 p m enter 1 6 4 5 m The time appears on system display phones as a m or p m not in 24 hour notation Programming To change the System Time 1 Pres
7. m Use External Hotline 4311 to identify an extension that automatically dials a preprogrammed outside number when a user lifts the handset Considerations m The same extension cannot be assigned as both a hotline and a doorphone Assigning a doorphone extension as a hotline extension cancels the doorphone setting m Do not assign hotline phones to extension 10 16 22 or 28 which are reserved as power failure extensions m The hotline phone can receive transferred calls but the user at that extension should not pick up the handset until the phone rings Valid Entries A hotline extension 11 15 17 21 23 27 29 33 An alert extension 10 33 or 70 for the loudspeaker paging system No hotline or alert extension assigned Example A supermarket installs a hotline phone at its meat counter When a customer uses the hotline phone the butcher s phone rings Alternatively if the loudspeaker paging system is selected as the hotline destination a sales clerk could request a price check over the loudspeaker simply by lifting the handset Hotline 603 5 71 Programming To identify a hotline extension and its alert extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 3 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the hotline extension number see Valid Entries on the previous page For example to program extension 33 as the hotline press 3 3 3 AttheData prompt
8. System Program System Program 4 0 4 Atthe List No prompt enter a list number 1 4 For example to select the first list press 1 At the Entry Atthe Data prompt select a list entry 01 10 prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter At this point m To enter other phone numbers in this list press Next Item and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To change the phone number you just entered press Remove and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove m Tocreate another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 2 Select another procedure using Next Procedure or Prev Procedure or exit programming mode 5 38 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Display Description System display phones have a 2 line 16 character per line display area on the top right corner for calling and programming feedback Specifically the display shows Current date excluding year day and time when the phone is idle Number dialed when making calls Duration of calls call timer Number and name if programmed of the extension calling when receiving an intercom call or transferred call Number and name if programmed of the extension returning a transferred call when no one answers at the destination extension Programming messages
9. 2 3 4 Press Feature 1 8 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using To respond to a voice interrupt on busy call you hear two beeps and the orginator s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking will probably also hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Askthe party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 5 149 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system and is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user transfer a caller directly to a specific extension s voice
10. 2 Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Assign a two digit code to the number by pressing Feature and two digits between 80 and 99 For example to assign code 81 press Feature 8 1 If a number is already assigned to the code it appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code the display reads Blank 4 Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it 5 At this point m To program another Personal Speed Dial number start from Step 3 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the two digit code m Toremove a Personal Speed Dial number enter the number s two digit code and press mic once 6 Continue programming or exit programming mode Using System Phone You can lift the handset or press Spkr before dialing 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press intercom 8 and the two digit line number 2 Press Feature 3 Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 If you did not specify an outside line the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display phone Standard Phone You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 To dial a programmed Personal Speed Dial number 1 Liftthe
11. 3 The display reads CallRstr Button 3 Select Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 Using To change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting 1 Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button on extension 10 The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button turns on and extension 10 appears busy to the system 2 Press the Auto Dial button for the desired extension repeatedly until its lights show the correct setting as follows m No Restriction The green light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady m Inside Only The red light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady m Local Only The green light next to the Auto Dial button flashes 3 Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button on extension 10 or lift the handset and replace it back in the cradle The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button goes off and extension 10 resumes normal operation 5 108 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Outside Conference Denial 109 Description This System Programming procedure determines whether users can include more than one outside party in a conference call Related Features m For instructions on making conference calls see Conference Calls m Use to drop the last outside party added to the conference
12. 401 410 499 455555 The following entries are invalid 4 44 To Create a Forced Account Code List 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 2 The display reads FrcdActCdList Entry Select a list entry 01 99 For example to select the third entry press o 3 The display reads FrcdActCdList 03 Enter up to six digits for the list entry If the account code is five digits or less you must press Enter to save the account code in memory At this point m To enter other account codes press Next item to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m Tochange the account code you just entered press Remove and enter the correct account code then press Enter m To delete the account code you just entered press Remove Select another procedure or exit programming mode Forced Account Code List 409 5 57 Group Call Distribution 206 Description This System Programming procedure assigns outside lines to Hunt Groups Doing so allows outside calls to ring directly into a Hunt Group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist You can assign lines to Hunt Groups 1 7 Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system Related Features You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions to Hunt Groups If you assign lines to Hunt Group 7 for the voice messaging
13. 504 Night Service Group 505 Hunt Group Extensions 601 Fax Machine Extensions 607 AA Extensions Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code 399 directly m For each type of phone program one extension Then use this procedure to copy the programming from the extension to the others with the same number of line buttons for example from an MLS 12D to an MLS 12 Programming To copy the programmed settings of one extension to another of the same type 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 2 8 Atthe Extension prompt enter the source extension to copy from For example to copy the current settings from extension 18 press 1 8 Atthe Data prompt enter the target extension to copy to any extension except the source extension is valid For example to copy to extension 22 press 2 2 At this point m Tocopy the same settings to another extension enter the new extension number m To copy another extension s settings press Next Item Or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Copy Settings 399 5 31 Dial Mode 201 Description This System Programming procedure identifies individual lines as touch tone or rotary You shoul
14. Catalog Sales PhoneCenter Authorized National Parts Sales Office Store Dealer Sales Center 800 451 2100 800 247 7000 800 222 7278 System Modules and Wiring Processor module Line Extension module 206E Includes module two 7 ft line cords and installation instructions Includes module four 7 ft line cords and instructions Line cord D2R Connects 206E and 400E modules to network interface clear color Specify length 7 standard length 14 or 25 ft 267F2 bridging adapter Connects two devices to one extension In Range Out of Building IROB protector Required when installing extensions in another building from the control unit two required per MLS model telephone one per standard phone or device Z300A Electromagnetic Interference EMI Filter Includes filter 7 ft line cord and installation instructions 267C line adapter Splits two outside lines from an RJ14 network Interface jack so that each line has its own modular plug do not use at extension jacks 355A 355AF adapter Connects call reporting device to primary processor module To locate the AT amp T PhoneCenter Store nearest you see the listing in your local telephone directory s white pages under AT amp T or call 1 800 222 3111 in the continental U S only To locate the nearest AT amp T Authorized Dealer check your local telephone directory s yellow pages Table B 1 Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacement Parts U S
15. Considerations m This feature setting applies to all system users m Aconference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator If outside conference is disallowed you can have one outside party and up to four inside parties If outside conference is allowed you can have up to two outside parties and up to three inside parties Valid Entries 1 Allow conference calls with up to two outside parties 2 Disallow conference calls with two outside parties Programming To allow or disallow conferences with two outside parties 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 0 9 2 Toallow or disallow up to two outside parties on a conference call press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Outside Conference Denial 109 5 109 Personal Speed Dial Numbers Description This Telephone Programming procedure lets you store up to 20 frequently dialed numbers for each extension Personal Speed Dial numbers can be dialed quickly by pressing Feature or at intercom dial tone on a standard phone and the two digit code from 80 through 99 The Personal Speed Dial numbers programmed for a particular extension are for use only at that extension Related Features m Personal speed dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing three buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets users d
16. Press 2 0 2 Dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn on 5 98 Message Light On F09XX Music On Hold 602 Description This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates the MUSIC ON HOLD jack on the processor module To provide recorded music or messages to callers on hold the jack must be active and an audio source must be connected to the jack Related Features m f Music on Hold is Active users with MLS model system phones can play Background Music through their phone s speaker m If the receptionist at extension 10 uses the Wake Up Service Button 115 to schedule wake up calls the recipients hear music on hold when they answer their wake up calls Considerations m If you have a voice messaging system using Music On Hold is highly recommended m f Music On Hold is Not Active or if no audio source is connected callers on hold hear silence m Transferred callers also hear music on hold until the call is answered m The audio source must be connected to the control unit using an RCA phono plug For more information see the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide m The volume of the audio source can be adjusted using the music on hold volume adjustment screw on the processor module For more information see the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide m If the audio source develops trouble such as a bad tape you can quickly
17. s s s e z 8 m All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code The following list entries prevent calls to the 900 area code Toll Call Prefix required 1900 and 0900 Toll Call Prefix not required 900 and 0900 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 5 37 All Telephone Numbers in One Exchange The following entries prevent calls to the 976 exchange Toll Call Prefix required 976 TOO 0111976 1976 0976 Prevents local calls Prevents direct dial calls to all area codes Prevents operator assisted calls to all area codes Prevents direct dial toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code Prevents operator assisted toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code Toll Call Prefix not required 976 101976 PEO Prevents local calls Prevents calls to area codes with 0 as the second digit such as 203 Prevents calls to area codes with 1 as the second digit such as 212 m International Long Distance To prevent international calls enter the international prefix number 011 m Long Distance To prevent long distance calls after using one of the local telephone company features that consist of a and two digits such as Call Blocking 67 enter 0 and 1 Programming To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers 1 2 9X COE ces veo Press Feature o 0
18. 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 15 press 1 5 3 To assign or unassign Forced Account Code Entry press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item Or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Forced Account Code Entry 307 5 55 Forced Account Code List 409 Description This System Programming procedure lets you identify a list of up to 99 account code verification entries for extensions that are forced to enter account codes Once a list is created any user at an extension programmed for Forced Account Code Entry must enter a valid account code one that matches a list entry before being allowed to make an outside call This feature ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Related Features An extension must be programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 for the Forced Account Code List to have any effect Considerations If you do not create a Forced Account Code List the system does not verify the account codes dialed at extensions that are required to enter them To validate an account code the system compares the first six digits of a user entered account code to the entries on the Forced Account Code List For a m
19. 3 Press the programmed button or press Feature 0 3 Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the programmed button or press Feature o 3 again Standard Phone 1 Press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature phone that has one You hear intercom dial tone Press 2 20 3 Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature phone again then press 0 3 again Recall F03 5 115 Recall Timer Duration 107 Description This System Programming procedure lets you change the length of the timed signal or switchhook flash generated by the system Recall feature as well as by the Recall option used in Auto Dial and Speed Dial numbers Recall sends this timed signal over the phone line to the local telephone company or PBX to which the system is connected Typically you use the Recall feature to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Your local phone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 Considerations You should change the factory setting only under two conditions If using the system Recall feature has no effect lengthen the time If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and using
20. 9 DIAL optional two digit extension number VMS COVER p 5 142 PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feawe 1 5 CE LOUDSPEAKER PAGING p 5 87 PRESS a programmable button PRIVACY p 5 113 PRESS left intercom 7 0 PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS eae TESTES VOICE INTERRUPT p 5 149 ON BUSY TALK BACK MANUAL SIGNALING p 5 93 n PRESS a programmable button RECALL p 5 114 PRESS a programmable button with ont PRESS A 8 PRESS Feature 1 3 dish a button Feature 1 8 DIAL the two digit extension number to ring extension or VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER p 5 150 DIAL x plus the two digit extension number SAVE NUMBER REDIAL p 5 118 PRESS a programmable button to voice signal the extension PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 4 PRESS Feature 2 4 v Factory setting i Button with lights required 518 455 224 August 1994 Graphics AT amp T 1988
21. All available extensions in the Calling Group ring To make a paging call press x z and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial z and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring 5 62 Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I 77G 1 77G Description This feature lets you distribute call volume among extensions in a group to offload call activity from a single user When an intercom or transferred call is placed to a Hunt Group where Gis a Hunt Group number from 1 7 the system rings or voice signals the first available non busy extension in the group passing over busy extensions or those with Do Not Disturb active in a circular hunt If a ringing call is not answered within three rings it moves to the next available extension and so on until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For a voice signaled call only the first available extension is signaled if that extension does not answer the call does not keep hunt
22. In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 10 Troubleshooting Calls on Hold Are Disconnected Possible Cause Hold Disconnect Time setting is too short What to do Change from Short to Long m f calls on hold no longer disconnect the problem is solved m If calls on hold still get disconnected or the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to Long call the AT amp T Helpline All Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 Control unit is not receiving power What to do Make sure the control unit s power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the main circuit breaker little plastic pop up tab shown in Figure 1 1 in Chapter 1 is in the ON position pushed in m If the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected m f the green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the AT amp T Helpline m f the green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 m f any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the AT amp T Helpline Possible Cause 2 The power outlet may be faulty What to do Test the outlet by plugging in an appliance like a lamp or radio m f the appliance does not work the outlet is faulty If possible plug the control unit into a different outlet Then check the fuse box or call an electrician
23. Line Ringing setting for the extension m lf Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work m f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Phone is faulty What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone and plug the cord into a phone that you know rings properly m f the replacement phone rings properly the problem phone is defective Call the AT amp T Helpline to arrange for a replacement m lf the replacement phone does not ring properly call the AT amp T Helpline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 2 Troubleshooting System Phone Display Does Not Work Possible Cause Date day and time are not set properly What to do Re enter the date day and time using System Date 101 System Day 4102 and System Time 103 m If the display is correct the problem is solved m lf the display is still not correct see System Phone Does Not Work System Phone Does Not Work Possible Cause 1 Phone needs to be reset What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone and with the handset hung
24. SMDR Top Of Page 609 5 123 Special Dialing Functions Description This feature lets you add special characters for System Speed Dial numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers and Auto Dial numbers as follows Function Button Display Description Pause Hold P Recall Sokr R Stop Mic S Touch Tone Transfer T Enable Considerations Inserts a 1 5 second pause in the dialing sequence to wait for a response such as a dial tone or computer voice message Sends a timed switchhook flash needed to alert the system on the other end such as a PBX or Centrex system and to use some local telephone company custom calling features such as Call Waiting Use Recall only as the first entry in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number Stops the dialing sequence until the Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number is used again for example so the user can enter additional digits such as a credit card number or password To continue press the Auto Dial button or Feature and the two or three digit Speed Dial code Stop cannot be programmed from an MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone since it has no Mic button Sends touch tones over a rotary line to electronic equipment such as answering machines and bank computers Special characters cannot be used when dialing a number manually Examples m Pause To call an answering machine at 555 0529 wait 4 5 seconds then dial 321 to retrieve messages enter
25. Service to that button Wake Up Service Button 115 5 151 Programming To program a Wake Up Service button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 4 s 2 Atthis point m If you want to assign Wake Up Service to the first available button on the system phone press Next Data until the display reads Wake Up Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Wake Up Service button assignment press Next Data until the display reads Wake Up Button 2 Not Assigned m If you want to assign Wake Up Service to a specific button press 3 The display reads Wake Up Button 3 Select Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Wake Up Service to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Using To schedule a wake up call for a specific extension 1 Press the Wake Up Service button on extension 10 The green light next to the Wake Up Service button flutters Wake Up Service is activated and the display reads Wake Up 2 Dial the two digit extension number of the desired extension or use an Auto Dial button For example to schedule a wake up call for extension 32 press 3 2 The display reads Wake Up 32 3 Enter the wake up time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press 1 4 1 5 When you have finished
26. and do not block the air vents by placing objects on top of the control unit m Do not place telephones near a heating duct radiator or other heat source and do not drop or expose them to excessive shock or vibration m Unplug the telephone if its cord is damaged if liquid is spilled into it or if its housing becomes cracked or otherwise damaged m Toclean your telephone wipe the outside housing with a soft dust free cloth If absolutely necessary you may use a cloth slightly dampened with a mild soap and water solution Dry quickly with a soft cloth A CAUTION Your telephone contains sensitive electronic parts Never submerge it in any kind of liquid and never use detergents alcohols solvents abrasive cleaners or an excessive amount of water when cleaning the housing and faceplate To do so could result in irreparable damage Repair Information Outside the continental U S contact your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer for warranty and repair information applicable to your system Maintenance B 1 In Warranty Repairs If you purchased or leased your system directly from AT amp T AT amp T will repair it free of charge during the one year warranty period Simply call the Helpline and ask for service Business Day service is standard during the warranty period for both the control unit and system phones Business Day service is performed during normal business hours However if you need 24 hour se
27. current Line Ringing settings Remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features To assign a name to the extension press left Intercom then enter the character codes See Extension Name Display in Chapter 5 for the codes Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers Auto Dial numbers or system features as described in Chapter 5 To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press mic To exit programming mode you can press Feature 0 0 or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle Programming 2 23 Learning About Telephones Contents m Ringing Patterns 3 5 Combination Extensions 3 11 Using Telephones 3 12 m Basic Call Handling Features 3 12 m Dial Code Features 3 13 Learning About Telephones This chapter explains how system and standard phones work with the system as well as combination extensions where more than one phone or standard device is installed System phones are described first followed by Iphones on page 3 8 and on page 3 11 in addition handling features are listed on page 3 12 See the feature name in Chapter 5 for details on a specific feature System Telephones System phones which include the MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 models have several buttons and indicators in common The following pages explain where they are and how they
28. enter the alert extension number see Valid Entries on the previous page For example to use extension 32 as the alert extension press 3 2 The display reads Hot Line 33 Data 32 4 Atthis point m Tochange the hotline and alert extension numbers you just entered repeat Steps 2 and 3 m To delete the existing hotline and alert extension numbers press Remove m To identify another hotline and alert extension pair press Next Item or Prev Item until the new hotline extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Using To use the hotline phone 1 Lift the handset of the hotline phone The designated alert extension rings 2 When the call is answered speak into the handset 5 72 Hotline 603 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign any number of extensions to a Hunt Group The system supports up to seven Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system Related Features for Hunt Groups 1 6 m For instructions on ringing or paging extensions in a Hunt Group or transferring calls to a Hunt Group see m f a ringing call to the Hunt Group is not answered within three rings the call moves to the next available extension in the Hunt Group If users in the Hunt Group leave their desks they should turn on Do Not Disturbl at th
29. m Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation m f you reassign the Night Service button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned Valid Entries 1 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select Button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button Night Service Button 503 5 101 Programming To program a Night Service Button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 0 3 2 Atthis point m f you want to assign Night Service to the first available button on the system phone press Next Data until the display reads Night Service 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Night Service button assignment press Next Data until the display reads Night Service 2 Not Assigned m lf you want to assign Night Service to a specific button press 3 The display reads Night Service 3 Select Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Night Service to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Night Service button at extension 10 Using To turn Night Service on 1 Press the Night Service button on extension 10 m f a System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must go on to Step 2 m f
30. m If the appliance works call the AT amp T Helpline Multiple Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 The LED on one system module is out What to do If the green LED on the front of a module is out try reseating the module in the control unit m If the LED lights the problem is corrected m If the problem remains call the AT amp T Helpline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 11 Possible Cause 2 The LEDs on several system modules are out What to do If the LEDs on the front of several system modules are out try reseating the leftmost module of the ones with the lights out see Replacing System Modules in the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide m If the LEDs light the problem is corrected m If the problem remains call the AT amp T Helpline Poor Transmission Quality on Modem Possible Cause A high speed modem is connected through an extension jack on the control unit to a standard central office telephone line but the line quality is not sufficient to generate a clear signal when the modem transmits through the system interface What to do Either connect the modem directly to the network interface jack for a line or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading line quality m lf the device works properly the proble
31. prompt enter the line to be programmed For example to select line 1 press 2 1 4 Toassign or remove a line for groups 1 6 or to assign or remove a line or use VMS Line Cover for group 7 press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis point m To program another line press Next Item or Prev item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Group Call Distribution 206 5 59 Group Calling Ring Page 17G 1 7G Description This feature lets users ring page or transfer calls simultaneously to all the extensions in any one of four Calling Groups G is a Calling Group number from 1 4 When paging the caller hears a beep and begins speaking the caller s voice is heard on the speakers of all idle system phones in the selected Calling Group The first extension to answer the call by picking up the handset or pressing Spok or by pressing mic to answer a page is connected to the caller Related Features You must use Calling Group Extensions 502 to assign extensions to a Calling Group Extensions assigned to Calling Group 1 can receive Simultaneous Paging Considerations Examples Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group If some extensions in a C
32. such as outcalling group lists broadcast messages and fax management You can refer to the documentation provided with your voice messaging system for complete details Delayed Call Handling Figure 4 13 shows a PARTNER MAIL VS system that provides delayed call handling This setup allows the receptionist at extension 10 to provide personalized service by answering calls during normal business hours The PARTNER MAIL VS system connected to extensions Z1 and Z2 is used to handle calls when the receptionist is busy or not available so calls do not go unanswered The PARTNER MAIL VS system also answers calls received outside of business hours and prompts callers to leave a message in the receptionist s mailbox This example also includes two user extensions X and Y which are not automatically covered by the PARTNER MAIL VS system This allows the receptionist to give the caller more personalized service if the receptionist transfers a call to extension X or Y and that extension does not answer the call returns to the receptionist The receptionist can then take a message or send the call to the extension s mailbox if the caller prefers 4 24 Using Auxiliary Equipment PARTNER MAIL VS System 2 2 J Ex Z1 Ext X not automatically covered by the PARTNER MAIL VS Ext Y System Ext 10 Receptionist s Desk Figure 4 13 Delayed Call Handling To Use Follow the instructions packaged with the PARTNER M
33. the doorphone is connected to an R3 1 206 or later module and the system is equipped with an R3 1 or later processor module Considerations An extension cannot be used for a doorphone and a hotline at the same time However hotlines and doorphones can have the same alert extensions You cannot assign doorphones to extension 10 11 16 17 22 23 28 or 29 Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from doorphone extensions You cannot bridge two doorphones together Valid Entries Extensions 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 None Assigned v Programming To program a doorphone extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 4 for doorphone 1 or 4 8 0 5 for doorphone 2 Enter the doorphone extension number For example to identify extension 20 as a doorphone extension press 2 o or press Remove to unassign an existing doorphone extension The display reads Door Phone 1 Data 20 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 5 45 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Description This System Programming procedure creates a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions provided they have access to an outside line Typical list entries include fire police and emergency services numbers Related Features m If an extension is programmed for Forced Account Code
34. 1 Press the switchhook The call you are on is placed on hold and you are connected to the new call 2 To return to the first call press the switchhook again 3 You can continue to press the switchhook to move back and forth between the two calls You cannot transfer either party connected using Call Waiting conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active 5 12 Answering Calls Auto Dialing Description Auto Dial buttons can be programmed only on system phones This Telephone Programming procedure lets system phone users dial outside numbers extension numbers feature codes or account codes with a single touch by pressing a programmed button An Auto Dial number can be stored on any programmable button a button with no line assigned on a system phone Related Features You can use the Auto Dial button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Call Fowarding Call Follow Me Message Light On Message Light Off Voice Mailbox Transfer To set up a Fax Management button program the fax extension number on an Auto Dial button with lights Special light patterns on the Auto Dial button for the fax extension indicate fax machine status Chapter 4 provides more information on using a Fax Management button Identify fax extensions using Fax Machine Extensions 601 You can include special functions such as a Pause in the Auto Dial number
35. 2 Enter a different account code c Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 If a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is invalid you hear denial tone Verify the account code then repeat Step 7 making sure to enter a valid account code 5 6 Account Code Entry F12 Allowed List Assignments 408 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to four Allowed Phone Number Lists to a specific extension Related Features You must use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create up to four lists of allowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure Valid Entries 1 Assigned to extension 2 Not Assigned to extension Programming To assign Allowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press Feature 2 2 System Program System Program 4 2 8 The display reads AllowTo Extension 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 27 press 2 z The display reads AllowTo 27 List No 3 Enter the list number 1 4 For example to select list 1 press 4 To assign or unassign the list press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis point m To assign or unassign another list to this extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the list number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension
36. 4 12 Using Auxiliary Equipment Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine There are two situations in which you would want to transfer a call to your fax machine W You answer an outside call and hear a fax machine signaling A fax signal is a single beep sequence beep beep beep If you hear this you should transfer the call immediately to the fax machine extension W You are on a call with a person who wants to send you a fax using the fax machine that is connected to his or her phone You can receive the fax by transferring the call to your fax extension Tell the other party to wait until he or she hears the fax signal before pressing the Start button on their fax machine In addition if you have a PARTNER MAIL system and a fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system its Automated Attendant Service can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or if you have multiple fax machines to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines There are four ways to transfer the call to the fax extension m f you have a Fax Management button simply press the button When the fax machine answers hang up W f you do not have a Fax Management button press Transfer plus the fax machine s extension number When the fax machine answers hang up m On a standard phone rapidly press and release the switchhook to place the call on hold then dial the fax extension number and hang
37. 5 5 5 o 5 2 9 Hold Hoa Hold 3 2 1 m Recall Centrex Feature Button The following entry shows how to program an Auto Dial button with a Centrex feature that you use while on a call for which the feature access code is 32 This example includes a Recall signal to send a switchhook flash to the Centrex system when you are already on a call You can store a Recall signal by pressing Sekr but only if it is the first character stored It also includes a 1 5 second pause which you insert by pressing Hold to allow time to get a new Centrex dial tone sek Hold x 3 2 5 124 Special Dialing Functions Stop Your local bank by phone service requires that you enter a password before the account number To program a Personal Speed Dial number or an Auto Dial button to call the bank at 555 7898 include a stop for manually entering the password and continue with the account number 679 88 enter 5 5 5 z a e 8 wi e z1 2 amp Touch Tone Enable Your system is connected to rotary lines but you want to call an answering machine at 555 3454 to retrieve messages Since the machine requires touch tones enter 5 5 5 3 4 5 4 Transfer All digits pressed during the rest of the call are sent as touch tones On Off Centrex Feature Button To include both the activation and deactivation codes for a Centrex feature on the same button press Mic to include a stop be
38. 5 13 5 14 phone piper on a button programmable buttons 2 17 3 2 3 3 5 13 quick reference charts End of book receptionist extension 2 17 o remote 24 42 restrictions and permissions 2 7 system 2 1 2 7 2 12 telephone Pulsedial b 32 5 117 O NENNEN Q Quick Reference for system phones B 4 Quick reference charts End of book Recall programming feature on a button 5 114 programming function in phone number 5 124 Recall Timer Duration 107 5 116 Receptionistextension 2 17 Redial Last Number SaveNumber 5 118 10 0 Reference materials B 4 Reminder service Remote programming 2 1 4 9 1 REN See Ringer Equivalence Number Repair Replacement parts B4 B 6 Request line 5 Reserving an ITE lineJ5 90 Resetting the system 5 129 6 12 Restriction Line Access 4302 5 79 15 80 Cd Outgoing Call 4401 5 105 5 106 Restrictions dialing disallowed phone numbers for fax machine 4 14 Cd for long distance line access 5 79 overriding2 8 5 46 5 128 5b 130 PBX Centrex operation programming summary types of outgoing calls 5 105 Retrieving a held call 5 6815 69 Ring Distinctive 308 5 42 _ 1 11 4 Ringer Equivalence Number REN HABASJA 23 Ringervolumecont
39. Call Restriction 4 amp 401 5 10515 106 1 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Outside Auto Dial numbers 5 14 Outside call making anj5 90 Outside Conference Denial 109 Outside line reserving an Outward restriction see Outgoing Overriding dialing restrictions 2 8 o Owner line 5 84 Loudspeaker MLS model phone S Simultaneous Paging 15 120 5421 PARTNER Attendant PARTNER Attendant extensions 5 2 sd PARTNER phones see System phones Cid PARTNER Voice Messaging Systems seelVoice sd Password System 403 Pause programming function in phone number 5 124 Permissions dialing 2 8 Personal Speed Dial numbers 2 16 5 110 1 5 111 Picking upaheldcall 5 6815 69 Cd Pickup Group Extensions 501 5 112 Pickup Call Placingacall 5 89 5 92 1 1 1 O PowercordB C6 1 1 Power failure Printer see Prvacy 5 15 5 113 1 1 O Privacy Automatic Extension 304 Problems solving 6 1 o Processor module 1 4 B 6 CC Programmable buttons 2 17 3 2 13 3 Programming seelalso System Programming and 2 5 o after installation 2 5 auxiliary equipment 2 10 centralized telephone 2 1 2 20 changing system 2 1 2 7 2 12 1 dial code features onto buttons extensions 2 1 2 4 2 20 2 23 for PBX Centrex support 2 6 groupsi2 10 S overlays overview 2 17
40. Change the extension s setting for Distinctive Ring 308 to Not Active so that the extension uses the same ringing for intercom and transferred calls as it does for outside calls m If the device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the AT amp T Helpline Standard Device Does Not Dial Out Properly Possible Cause A standard device with autodialing such as a modem does not recognize the intercom dial tone generated by the system What to do Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone 309 for the extension to Machine so that the system generates outside line dial tone for the extension m lf the device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the AT amp T Helpline System Problems Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect Possible Cause 1 Hold Disconnect Time setting is too long What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 from Long to Short m f abandoned calls on hold are disconnected the problem is solved m f abandoned calls on hold still do not disconnect or the Hold Disconnect Time was already Short go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Local phone company does not send hold release signal What to do Call your local phone company and find out whether they send a hold release signal If the local phone company does not send a hold release signal or if they do but the problem still occurs call the AT amp T Helpline
41. Entry 307 ja user at the extension is required to enter an account code before dialing a number in the Emergency Phone Number List m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls Considerations m Each telephone number can include up to 12 digits m When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers you should 1 remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Valid Entries Up to 12 digits 0 9 Examples The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for the Emergency Phone Number List in Step 3 of Programming m 911 To allow 911 calls from any extension that has an outside line create the following entry for the Emergency List 911 m Overriding Number on a Disallowed List You can use Emergency List entries to override numbers that would otherwise be disallowed For example if you have created Disallowed List entries to prevent toll calls to area code 201 but you want to allow calls to a specific number in that area code such as the number of a manager who is on call after hours put the number in the Emergency
42. Immediate Ring set the lines assigned at each user s extension to Delayed Ring or No Ring m Backup Call Answering f the receptionist should answer some lines only when a user does not pick up set Line Ringing tor those lines at extension 10 to Delayed Ring set the lines assigned at each user s extension to Immediate Ring m No Answering lf some lines should not be picked up by the receptionist at all either set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to No Ring or simply use Line Assignment 301 to remove those lines from extension 10 In either case set to No Access for those lines at extension 10 to prevent the receptionist from using Direct Line Pickup to access those lines Programming 2 17 Button Programming The MLS 34D phone shown in Figure 2 4 illustrates the following programmed buttons in addition to some other system features m Extension Numbers Auto Dial buttons are programmed for extensions 11 through 29 starting with the top left button shown in Figure 2 4 The receptionist can use these buttons to dial or transfer calls to the extensions with one touch In addition the lights of these Auto Dial buttons show the status of the extension so the receptionist can tell whether the phone at the extension is idle no lights on busy red on calling the receptionist green flash manually signaling the receptionist green flutter or ringing back after the receptionist transferred a call green flutter
43. Possible Cause 2 Call Forwarding is turned on What to do Check to see if Call Forwarding is turned on m If Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m f Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m f Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work m f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Phone is faulty What to do Unplug the problem phone and plug in a standard phone that you know rings properly m lf the replacement phone rings properly the problem phone is defective Replace it m If the replacement phone does not ring properly call the AT amp T Helpline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 4 Troubleshooting Standard Phone Rings Back After Intercom Call with No One at Other End Possible Cause 1 The switchhook on the standard phone is accidentally pressed and released causing a call to ring back What to do Always replace the handset carefully If the problem is not
44. Ring Delayed Ring phone rings after a 20 second delay or No Ring Personal Speed Dialing Personal Speed Dial numbers are outside phone numbers that a user dials by pressing Feature or on a standard phone plus a two digit code Unlike System Speed Dial numbers which are available to all users in the system Personal Speed Dial numbers are available only at the extension for which they are programmed Users can store up to 20 Personal Speed Dial numbers 2 16 Programming Programming Telephone Buttons Telephone buttons without lines assigned to them can be programmed for system features such as Exclusive Hold or Conference Drop or for telephone numbers so you can use the feature or dial the phone number with one touch Once programmed these buttons are called Auto Dial buttons because simply pressing the button automatically dials the feature code or the telephone number A user who has a system phone with programmable buttons should consider programming them with a combination of frequently used features and outside and intercom telephone numbers Programming a Receptionist s Extension Call Handling Options If you set up a centralized telephone answering position at extension 10 use the following settings to customize it m Immediate Call Answering lf the receptionist should answer all calls use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension 10 Set Line IRinging for all lines at extension 10 to
45. Rings 117 Using To send a call immediately to the voice messaging system m If VMS Cover is not turned on while the call is ringing press the VMS Cover button The ringing call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox subsequent calls go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings m f VMS Cover is already turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All covered calls are sent immediately to the voice messaging system until you turn off Do Not Disturb Send All Calls 5 119 Simultaneous Paging 1 70 Description This feature accesses the loudspeaker paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the primary processor module and all of the idle systems phones with speakers assigned to Calling Group 1 Related Features m You must use Calling Group Extensions 502 to identify the extensions in Calling Group 1 m Use Loudspeaker Paging to make announcements only over the loudspeaker paging system Considerations m You can program a Simultaneous Paging button on a system phone to access with one touch the loudspeaker paging system and idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 If the loudspeaker paging system or Calling Group 1 is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone If someone answers a loudspeaker page from a system phone in Calling Group 1 the page becomes an intercom call m f some extensions in Callin
46. See Special Dialing Functions for more information Considerations If you program an extension number on a button with lights the lights show calling activity at the extension see Lights in Chapter 3 Similarly you can connect an MLS CA24 Intercom Autodialer to the system phones at extension 10 and 11 to have Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system up to 24 this lets the users at extensions 10 and 11 dial or transfer calls to an extension or signal an extension by pressing one button Each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system phone or on the MLS CA24 Intercom Autodialer for another extension in the system That button can be programmed for intercom ringing intercom voice signaling or manual signaling When programming emergency numbers for Auto Dialing and or making test calls to those numbers you should 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Auto Dial buttons do not override dialing restrictions for an extension MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 system phones only have four buttons available for lines and or Auto Dial numbers For PBX or Centrex systems that require a dial out code to make calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code followed by one or more pauses if available on an Aut
47. Similarly you can use a visual alert strobe or light to replace a phone ring in a quiet area such as a library AT amp T offers several compatible alerts m Speakerphones provide hands free two way operation of a phone without lifting the handset Combining a speakerphone with a system phone or a standard phone in a conference room or office is an inexpensive way for several people at a meeting to conference in other parties System phone speakers are designed for individual use not group use The system supports the AT amp T S203 speakerphone and any industry standard speakerphone 4 2 Using Auxiliary Equipment m Headsets allow users to hold hands free conversations A headset is a combination earphone and microphone worn on the head useful for receptionists salespeople or others who need to have their hands free while talking on the phone AT amp T offers several compatible headsets m Specialty Handsets are designed for those individuals who need greater functionality than that provided by the handsets on system phones and standard phones For example an amplified handset is available for certain system phones for hard of hearing users m In Range Out of Building IROB protectors are required to prevent electrical surges from damaging your system when phones are installed in another building but on the same continuous property The system supports the AT amp T IROB protector which provides coverage for up to 3 000 feet 915
48. T Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs AT amp T Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability AT amp T warrants to you the customer that your system will be in good working order on the date AT amp T or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Date If you notify AT amp T or its authorized reseller within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order AT amp T will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good working order Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis If AT amp T determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced AT amp T will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another AT amp T system B 2 Maintenance If you purchased your system directly from AT amp T AT amp T will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of AT amp T maintenance coverage you selected A written explanation of AT amp T s types of maintenance coverage may be obtained from AT amp T by calling 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you purchased your system from an AT amp T authorized reseller contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This AT amp T li
49. active calls but retains system settings Use it only if the system fails to function correctly afler a power failure or down period DIAL 728 AS cR LINE ASSIGNMENT DIAL 301 DIAL an extension number 10 33 To remove all existing line assignments press Remove before selecting a line DIAL a line number 01 12 DIAL 1 Assigned v 2 Not assigned 3 Select Buttonthen press a programmable button to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a Line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select PRESS Next Item to program anothe line for this extension To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension num ber and repeat above steps p 5 81 v LINE ACCESS RESTRICTION DIAL 302 p 5 79 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL a line number 01 12 DIAL 1 No Restriction 2 Outgoing Only 3 Incoming Only 4 No Access line appears on button but you can use line only to pick up a transferred or held call PRESS Next Item to program another ine To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension num ber and repeat above steps V DISPLAY LANGUAGE DIAL 303 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Englishv 2 Spanish 3 French PRESS Next Item to program anothe extension p 5 41 Y Factory setting
50. and prompts when in programming mode AA or VMS when a call is transferred from a PARTNER Attendant or the voice messaging system Transfer from AA or Transfer from VMS if a call is returning to your extension after an unsuccessful transfer by a PARTNER Attendant or the voice messaging system Wake Up on the display of users receiving a wake up call When you are entering an account code the account code being entered When you are in Telephone Programming mode the current line assignment feature code or Speed Dial number if any assigned to a button displays when the button is pressed Blank displays if nothing is programmed Related Features The System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 settings are shown as the default display You can use Display Language 303 to identify the language in which messages appear if the extension has a system display phone Users can assign a name up to 12 characters long to their extension Then when that extension is used to make an intercom call group call or transferred call the name and extension number appear on the system display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call See Display for more information Display 5 39 Considerations m The call timer records the time a user is active on
51. available extension DIAL optional two digit originating PRESS a programmable button p 5 63 extension number PRESS left intercom Z Z DIAL optional two digit destination DO NOT DISTURB p 5 43 DIAL a Hunt Group number 1 7 extension number a PRESS a programmable button with lights For voice signaling the first available extension PRESS Feature 0 1 as PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom x z z DIAL a Hunt Group number 1 6 CALL PICKUP p 5 25 PRESS a programmable button EXCLUSIVE HOLD p 5 48 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 0 2 PRESS left intercom 6 DIAL the two digit extension number PICKUP GROUP EXTENSIONS NIGHT SERVICE GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL a group number 1 4 DIAL an extension number 10 33 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v PRESS next Item to assign another DIAL an extension number 10 33 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v PRESS Next item to assign another HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS CALLING GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL a group number 1 6 7 for VMS DIAL an extension number 10 33 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v PRESS Next item to assign another DIAL a group number 1 4 DIAL an extension number 10 33 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v PRESS Next Item to assign another VMS HUNT DELAY NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON 1
52. beeps is not repeated m Use Call Waiting only for regular standard phone extensions Do not Assign Call Waiting to extensions that have fax machines credit card scanners modems or auto attendants because the call waiting tone will interrupt the data connection m You cannot transfer either party connected using Call Waiting conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active m Transfer return group call distribution hunt group and wake up calls are not considered incoming calls for this feature Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Programming To change the Call Waiting setting for an extension 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program 3 1 6 2 Enter the number of the extension to receive Call Waiting For example to program extension 11 enter 1 1 3 Toassign or unassign Call Waiting press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item Or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 26 Call Waiting 316 Calling Group Extensions 502 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the extensions in a Calling Group a group of extensions that can be called at the same time Any user in the system can ring or page all extensions in a Calling Group at the same tim
53. by amp and the two digit extension number 10 33 For example to answer calls on extension 23 press intercom 6 2 3 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press Intercom 6 and the two digit number of the ringing extension to pick up the call Standard Phone 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 plus the two digit number of the ringing extension to pick up the call Call Pickup I6XX 5 25 Call Waiting 316 Description This feature applies only to standard phones This System Programming procedure specifies standard phone extensions that are eligible for Call Waiting Users at standard phones that receive a call waiting tone will hear two beeps when they are busy on a call to indicate a second incoming intercom transferred or outside call The user can then press the switchhook or Recall or Flash button if available to put the current call on hold and retrieve the second call To return to the first call the user simply presses the switchhook again Related Features For instructions on using Call Waiting see Answering Calls Considerations m This feature is distinct from the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature If you use this system feature do not use your local telephone company s Call Waiting feature m The Call Waiting tone two
54. call is accepted hang up If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking will probably also hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller Transferring Calls 5 139 Transfer Return Extension 7306 Description By default transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered This System Programming procedure can be used to identify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call Related Features m You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to define the number of times all system extensions should ring with transferred calls before they return to their transfe
55. entering the time the display reads Wake Up 32 14 15 The wake up call is scheduled and the green light next to the Wake Up Service button turns off 5 152 Wake Up Service Button 115 To review a scheduled wake up time for a specific extension 1 2 3 4 5 Press the Wake Up Service button on extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Review the displayed wake up time and target extension number Press the Wake Up Service button to exit Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to review wake up times for other extensions To cancel a scheduled wake up call iis 2 3 4 Press the Wake Up Service button on extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Press Repeat Steps 1 3 to cancel a scheduled wake up call for another extension Wake Up Service Button 115 5 153 Troubleshooting Contents When You Need Help 6 1 Power Failure Operation 6 1 Problems with Standard Phones 6 4 m Standard Phone Does Not Ring 6 4 m Standard Phone Rings Back After Intercom Call with No One at Other End 6 5 m Standard Phone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light 6 5 Problems with Combination Extensions 6 6 m Phone Does Not Work Properly 6 6 Other Problems with Phones 6 7 m Trouble Making Outside Calls 6 7 m Calls are Answered Automaticall 6 8 m Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer 6 9 m Using the Recall Feature Has No Effec
56. example System Date is 101 This method is best when you are using only a few procedures during a programming session and you know the codes m Cycle Method to cycle through the procedures in numerical order Press Next Procedure and Prev Procedure to cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures This method is best when you are using multiple procedures during a programming session or if you do not know the codes 6 To exit programming mode you can press Feature 0 0 or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle NOTE You can talk on the phone while you program This is useful if you need to talk with someone at the AT amp T Helpline about programming However you must call before you enter programming mode and you must use the handset to talk not the speaker and microphone Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program To move back to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press Central Tel Program then System Program Remote Programming The system permits programming from remote locations using an auxiliary device called the Remote Administration Unit RAU Remote programming requires the installation of two RAUs one at your
57. extension Programming To assign Disallowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 5 The display reads DisallowTo Extension 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 27 press 2 z The display reads DisallowTo 27 List No 3 Enter the list number 1 4 For example to select list 1 press 1 4 To assign or unassign the list press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis point m To assign or unassign another list for this extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the list number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 36 Disallowed List Assignments 405 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Description This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users cannot dial For example you may want to prevent calls to a specific telephone number or to categories of numbers such as international numbers Use this procedure to create up to four lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each Related Features m After completing this procedure you must use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign the Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions m
58. extension cannot place calls on that line either by pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup ldle Line Likewise if the extension s access to a line is set to No Access or Out Only the extension cannot receive calls on that line that are ringing at other extensions either by pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup Active Line m When a user has access to an outside line for outgoing calls dialing restrictions can be customized for the user s extension by using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Considerations If a line is assigned to a phone but is restricted to No Access the line button lights show calling activity but the line cannot be used to place or receive calls Valid Entries 1 No Restriction calls permitted on that line 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on that line 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on that line 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can join calls receive transferred calls or pick up calls on hold on that line Line Access Restriction 302 5 79 Programming To restrict an extension from making calls on a specific line 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the extension number to be programmed For example to program extension 23 press 2 3 At
59. external hotline phone number is dialed automatically If you do not hear dial tone or dialing noises hang up for about 20 seconds and try again When the call is answered speak into the handset 5 52 External Hotline 311 Fax Machine Extensions 601 Description This System Programming procedure identifies extensions to which fax machines are connected Related Features m f you want to monitor fax machine status and make one touch transfers to the fax machine see Auto Dialing to program a Fax Management button and Fax Management Feature Jin Chapter 4 to use the button W To prevent other extensions from interrupting a fax call program the fax extension for Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Considerations m Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from fax machine extensions m If an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system the Automated Attendant Service of that system may be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines if you have multiple fax machines See the PARTNER MAIL documentation for instructions Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming To identify a Fax Machine extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 8 0 1 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected For example to identify extensio
60. fax or modem that has trouble making calls For example if you have a modem that checks for outside line dial tone before dialing use this procedure to change from Regular to Machine dial tone Considerations Use this procedure only if an autodialing device has trouble making calls Valid Entries 1 Regular dial tone 2 Machine outside line dial tone Programming To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 9 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 22 press 2 2 3 Tochange the Intercom Dial Tone setting press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item Or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Intercom Dial Tone 309 5 75 J oining Calls Description Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress the same way you do on a home telephone by picking up an extension This is different from conferencing in which the originator pulls you into the call Up to three system extensions can join a call on an outside line for a total of one outside and four inside parties Related Features m You can use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensio
61. features Table 1 1 System Phones a C MDW MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MRS MDN Total Number of 32 16 16 16 4 4 4 4 Programmable Buttons Line Capacity Number 4 a of E 12 12 10 10 4 4 Buttons with Status Lights Intercom Buttons 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Display v v v am m m Speaker v v v v v m Microphone v v v v EX The MLS 34D has 32 programmable buttons with status lights and the MLS 18D has 16 programmable buttons with status lights Since the system supports a maximum of 12 lines you can use up to 12 buttons on these phones for outside lines Overview 1 5 Intercom Autodialers The system phones at extensions 10 and 11 each support one MLS CA24 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer which provides Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system up to 24 Users can program the Auto Dial buttons for either intercom ringing voice signaling or manual signaling Note that each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system phone oron the autodialer for another extension in the system The Auto Dial buttons allow the user to dial signal or transfer calls to system extensions with one touch The status lights for the buttons also indicate calling activity at each extension For more information about Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing in Chapter 5 Standard Telephones You can also use industry st
62. handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number Personal Speed Dial Numbers 5 111 Pickup Group Extensions 501 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign extensions to a Pickup Group When a call rings at an extension in a Pickup Group a user at any other extension in the system can answer the ringing call by dialing the Pickup Group code The Pickup Group feature is useful when a user needs to answer calls on lines not assigned to his or her phone The system supports up to four Pickup Groups Related Features For instructions on answering calls in a Pickup Group see Group Pickup Considerations m An extension can be assigned to as many as four different Pickup Groups m Extensions where extra alerts such as a loud bell are installed can be assigned to a Pickup Group to enable anyone who hears the alert to answer the call Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Programming To assign extensions to a Pickup Group 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 0 1 2 AttheGroup prompt enter a group number 1 4 For example to select group 1 press 1 The display reads Pickup Group 1 Extension 3 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select exten
63. i s sY Hold Reminder Tonej5 Hold Exclusive Holding a call 5 48 5 68 Hotel Motel features description Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Wake Up Service Button 115 Hotline 603 Hotline External 5 5145 52 Hunt Group Extensions 505 ee Hunt Groups see also Group Call Distribution description 2 10 programming 5 74 using VMS 5 145 5 146 1 1 1 Idle Line Preference see Immediate call answering Immediate ring 5 85 sd In Range Out of Building protectors 4 3 A 3 B 6 Indicators system telephone 3 2 13 3 S Industry standard devices see Inside call makingan 5 91 Intercom Auto Dial buttons 2 18 5 144 Intercom Autodialers Be Intercom buttons 3 2 Intercom call makingan 5 91 Intercom Dial Tone 309 5 75 Intercom status 2 18 3 4 O Internal Hotline see Hotline IROB see In Range Out of Building protectors Co TP J Jacks 2 8 Joiningacall b 76 5 77 Cd EEES L Labeling line andextensionjacks 2 2 systemphones 2 21 Language Display 303 5 41 Z Last Number Redial Light patterns description of FaxManagementbutton 4 12 11 Intercom Auto Dial Button 2 18 3 4 adding to system 2 3 12 5 assigning to extensions 5 81 5 83 5 104 buttons 3 2 3 3 Line restr
64. later time to redial the number m You can program this feature on more than one button to save more than one number Programming To program a Save Number Redial button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press Feature 0 4 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using To save a number From a system phone press the programmed button or press Featue 0 4 after dialing the number but before hanging up To redial a stored number Press the programmed button again or press Feature 0 4 again 5 118 Save Number Redial F04 Send All Calls Description You can use the VMS Cover or Do Not Disturb buttons to send intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on owned lines immediately to your voice mailbox Related Features W Use Line Coverage Extension 208 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the user at that extension has the ability to m If VMS Cover is already on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice mailbox This allows callers to leave a message without having to wait for the number of rings specified with Cover
65. length such as a telephone number in an Allowed Phone Number List System Program starts the System Programming process Central Tel Program starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process to customize individual telephones centrally from extension 10 or 11 Feature when followed by o a enters or exits programming mode wila enters a wildcard a character that matches any digit dialed in telephone numbers in Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and the Forced Account Code List 409 Programming Mode 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 see The Programming Overlays earlier in this chapter for more information To enter programming mode press Feature 0 0 The display reads PROGRAM EXT 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 Press System Program The display reads 10 Enter name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering System Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 4 Press System Program again The display reads SYSTEM PROGRAM 2 14 Programming 5 Specify a programming procedure in one of two ways m Direct Method to dial the code for that procedure System Programming procedures in this guide are identified by anda three digit code for
66. lines coming into your building to the extensions in your system and also provides system features HEN D DGC Group See Group Call Distribution and Hunt Group Doorphone An AT amp T proprietary phone that can be wall mounted outside your office or in a lobby to allow visitors to alert any number of system extensions by pressing a button The doorphone includes a speaker and microphone to allow two way conversation between the doorphone and the phone that answers Do Not Disturb A feature that prevents incoming calls from ringing at an extension See also Send All Calls Extension An endpoint in the system numbered 10 33 that connects telephones or standard devices which can be dialed using the intercom button See also Programming extension Extension jack The location on 206 modules that allows you to connect extension wiring to the control unit for phones or other telecommunications devices Extension number The number assigned to each extension jack on a 206 module Extension numbers run consecutively from 10 through 33 and are used for intercom calling GL 2 Glossary NENNEN P V 9 amp VV Extension Name Display A feature that lets users assign a name to their extension The name appears along with the extension number on system display phones when users make an intercom call or a group call or transfer a call Extension Programming A method of telephone programming that lets user
67. m lf the phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Wrong bridging adapter is used in combination extension What to do First unplug the bridging adapter from the wall jack Then unplug the phone from the adapter and plug the phone directly into the wall jack m lf the phone works there is a problem with the bridging adapter Replace the bridging adapter use only an AT amp T 267F2 bridging adapter If the problem persists call the AT amp T Helpline m If the phone still does not work call the AT amp T Helpline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 6 Troubleshooting Other Problems with Phones Trouble Making Outside Calls Trouble making outside calls could be one of the following m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial m You hear a dial tone and the dial tone cuts off when you dial but the line does not ring m You hear a busy signal as you dial m You hear nothing at all Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to your extension What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to your extension If it is enter a valid account code m f you can make a call the problem is solved m f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned to your extension go to
68. may need to change the system clock for daylight saving time after a prolonged power failure or after a system reset Use System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 to set the current date day and time Adding New Lines If you add an outside line to your system you may need to adjust some line settings In particular use if the new line is a rotary line Assignment 301 to assign the line to specific extensions mp Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when the line will start ringing at each extension that has the line and Line Access Restriction 302 to limit an extension s access to the line Additionally the system automatically assigns the new line as the last line in the Automatic Line Selection sequence If you want to change the order use Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming IMPORTANT Do not use if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes and for existing lines back to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 Adding New Extensions If you add an extension to your system you can probably use Copy Settings 399 to copy the settings of an existing extension If you wish to further adjust a new extension s settings see Customizing Extensions earlier in this chapter Programming 2 5 Swapping Extensions If a user changes physica
69. one touch See also Programmable button Automated Attendant Service A voice messaging system feature that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement See a so PARTNER Attendant and Auxiliary equipment Telecommunications equipment other than system phones that can be connected to the control unit Auxiliary equipment includes industry standard devices that can connect directly to the public telephone network such as standard phones or fax machines as well as devices that require the interface provided by the control unit such as a loudspeaker paging system EE 9C 9 v9 9O9A B Backplane The bottom and rear portion of the plastic housing that makes up the control unit The backplane distributes power to the system modules installed in the control unit Background Music A feature that provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user s work area Background Music plays the pre recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source HEN C Call Answer Service A voice messaging system feature that lets callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or transfer themselves to another extension Call Assistant See Intercom Autodialer MLS CA24 Call record A line of information on a call report that includes data fields such as call type date time called caller number and
70. paging system as a hotline alert extension so that the hotline phone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker For more information see Hotline 603 Considerations m You can program a Loudspeaker Paging button on a system phone to access the loudspeaker with one touch m lf the loudspeaker paging system is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone Programming To program a Loudspeaker Paging button Press Feature 0 2 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 1 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press left Intercom Intercom 0 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system 1 Press the programmed button or intercom z a then lift the handset 2 Speak into the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Loudspeaker Paging 170 5 87 Standard Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial z a 3 Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the lo
71. phone except the MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones has a speaker which you can turn on by pressing So When the green light next to Sokr is on the speaker is on MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D and MLS 12 phones also have a microphone On these phones pressing Spkr turns on both the speaker and the microphone In addition you can turn just the microphone on and off by pressing mic When the green light next to vic is on the microphone is on If you prefer to dial and conduct calls without lifting the handset you can use the speaker and the microphone instead Use these techniques to make calls with the speaker and the microphone if you have one m To make a call without lifting the handset press Spkr to get a dial tone then dial the number and you will hear the call ringing When the other party answers you can talk without lifting the handset On MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones which have no microphone you must lift the handset to talk when the other party answers You cannot listen through the handset and the phone s speaker at the same time Learning About Telephones 3 5 m To turn off the microphone when you are using the speaker press mic This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you m lf you are already on a call on an MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D or MLS 12 phone you can switch from the handset to the speaker and microphone by pressing Spkr and hanging up the han
72. phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to the Calling Group while on a call press the programmed button You must use a button programmed for ringing a Calling Group to transfer a call You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 5 61 To ring or page a Calling Group manually 1 Liftthe handset and press intercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 To make a ringing call dial 7 and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring To make a paging call press x z and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to a Calling Group manually 1 While on a call press Transfer 2 Dial 7 and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Standard Phone To ring or page a Calling Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Tomake a ringing call dial 7 and a group number 1 4
73. problem is not solved call the AT amp T Helpline Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too short What to do Increase the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m If the Recall feature works the problem is solved m If the Recall feature still does not work continue increasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call This problem applies when the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex system or with the local phone company s Call Waiting feature Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too long What to do Decrease the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m lf the Recall feature works properly the problem is solved m If the Recall feature still disconnects calls continue decreasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 9 Problems with Standard Devices Standard Device Does Not Answer Possible Cause A standard device such as a fax machine or answering machine does not answer intercom calls or transferred calls because it does not recognize the distinctive ringing pattern used by the system What to do
74. s unanswered intercom and transferred calls to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after a specified number of rings default for all system extensions is 3 rings so callers can leave a message Related Features m To manually change an extension s VMS Cover state users can program the VMS Cover feature on a button with lights Users can then press the VMS Cover button to activate the feature green light on or deactivate the feature green light off If Automatic VMS Cover is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the VMS Cover button to indicate that VMS Cover is currently active If this is the case and the VMS Cover button is pressed the feature is deactivated To activate VMS Cover again you must press the button m Automatic VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 m Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at all system extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system W Users with Automatic VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox m lf an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the forwarding destination they are not covered by the voice messaging system Considerations Standard phones
75. solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Automatic Line Selection is programmed incorrectly What to do If one of the phones involved is a standard single line rotary or touch tone telephone set its Automatic Line Selection to intercom first If the problem is not solved call the AT amp T Helpline Standard Phone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light Possible Cause 1 The standard phone is part of a combination extension that also includes a system phone with Background Music on What to do Check to see if the system phone has Background Music on because a standard phone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the System phone m f Background Music is on turn it off If the standard phone s message waiting light lights properly the problem is solved m f Background Music is not on go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The standard phone s message waiting light is not compatible with the system What to do See Standard Telephones in Chapter 1 for a list of supported standard phones with message waiting lights and check with your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out if there are others m If the phone is not supported you can use it without message waiting capability m If the phone is supported go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The standard phone is not connected to the proper hardware What to do Make sure the phone is connected
76. system extension Internal call See Intercom call L Line The transmission path between your control unit and the local phone company s central office used for incoming and outgoing calls Line button A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific line for making calls Line hunting See Group Call Distribution Line jack The location on 206 and 400 modules that allows you to connect outside lines to the control unit Line number The number assigned to each line jack on a 206 or 400 module Line numbers run consecutively from 01 through 12 Line Reserve A system feature that lets you reserve a busy line by pressing the busy line button without lifting the handset so your phone beeps when the line becomes free Loudspeaker paging system Equipment that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker from a system extension Any AT amp T paging system can be connected to the PAGE jack on the processor module in the control unit See also Simultaneous Paging Glossary GL 3 ME M Mailbox See Voice mailbox Manual Signaling A feature that lets a user signal an extension by pressing a programmed button The phone at the target extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed Alternatively the Manual Signaling button can be used to ring or voice signal the target extension See also Intercom Auto Dial button MDC 9000 Telephones See MDW 9000 Telephones See MLC 6 Tel
77. system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display If you are restricting an extension from placing toll calls do not place numbers beginning with a 0 on an Allowed Phone Number List for the extension Once a user is active on an operator assisted call the user will be able to avoid dialing restrictions by asking the operator to dial restricted numbers m f you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone numbers in a list you must use Next Procedure or Prev Procedure to do so since entering 2 and a three digit code will be considered data for the telephone number Valid Entries Up to 12 digits including 0 9 2 x and Hold any single digit 5 8 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Examples The examples below show how you would enter telephone numbers for an Allowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of Programming When an Allowed List is assigned to an extension users can dial numbers on that list even if the numbers would otherwise be restricted W Specific Telephone Numbers Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it For example to allow calls to the number 201 555 1111 make the following entries Toll Call Prefix required 12015551111 Toll Call Prefix not required 2015551111 All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code The following list entries allow calls to the 800 area code Toll Call Prefix required 1800 Toll C
78. system phone at the user s extension Keep in mind the following exceptions m Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing always must be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming m lfauserhas a standard phone Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming m fa user has a standard phone or a non display system phone Extension Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming During Centralized Telephone Programming the display phone at extension 10 or 11 takes on the characteristics of the telephone being programmed including any System Programming settings and lines assigned to the phone Make sure the programming phone is as large as the largest phone in the system because an MLS 18D phone cannot program an MLS 34D phone and an MLS 12D phone cannot program an MLS 18D phone or an MLS 34D phone 2 20 Programming MLS 34D Phone Line Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable MLS 18D Phone Line Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable MLS 12D MLS I2 Phone display on MLS 12D only Programmable Buttons without lights Line Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable MLS 6 Phone Line Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable nest 11 MZ 72 ele pe Est 17 _ Est 18 n n Belg Est 2
79. that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 IC Certification No 230 3756A CSA Certification No LR 60486 Load No 7 FCC Information C 3 Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Industrie Canada et la r paration L tiquette du minist re des Industrie Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme a certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le Minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce m teriel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communication Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de peuvent etre prolonges au moyen d un dispositif homologue de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l enterprise utilis s pour un service individuel ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communication ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur m teriel des jacks d abonn sauf dans
80. the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 1 3 Dial the two digit extension number of the target extension For example to identify extension 22 as the target extension press 2 2 Enter x before the extension number if you want to use the button for voice signaling Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To manually signal the target extension While the handset is in the cradle press the programmed button The extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed To ring or voice signal the target extension Lift the handset or press Spkr then press Intercom and the programmed button To transfer a call to the target extension While active on the call press Transfer then the programmed button 5 94 Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX Message Light Off F 10XX Description This feature turns off the message light at a specified extension where XX is an extension number from 10 33 Related Features For instructions on turning on the message light see Message Light On Considerations This feature turns off the message light on system phones and standard phones that have message lights See Standard Telephones in Chapter 1 for a list of standard phones with message lights For message waiting capability standard phones with message waiting lights must be connected to an R3 1 or late
81. the last number use the system s Last Number Redial feature by pressing 2 0 5 Combination Extensions A combination extension is an extension with two devices connected to it either two standard devices or a system phone and a standard device but not two system phones For instructions on how to install a combination extension see the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide The following are examples of useful combination extensions m System phone plus standard telephone for power failure backup on extensions 10 16 22 and 28 m System phone plus answering machine m System phone plus fax machine m System phone plus headset m System phone plus an external alert such as a bell or chime Using the telephones in a combination extension is fairly simple The main thing to understand is that the two telephones share a single extension in the same way several home telephones share a single line A system telephone works like it always does and a standard telephone works like it always does when connected to the system Only one phone or device can be used at a time unless you want to join the two on a single call the same way two people can pick up the same call on different telephones at home For example m Both phones share the same extension number m Both phones share the same voice path that is when either phone is busy the extension is busy m Calls ring at both phones W A second call
82. the two answering machines to answer on a different number of rings assign some lines to Immediate Ring at extension X and other lines to Immediate Ring at extension Y 4 6 Using Auxiliary Equipment Personal Answering Machine A personal answering machine is used to answer all the calls that ring at a certain extension Figure 4 3 It is useful for the following situations m When you do not want to dedicate an extension to an answering machine m When the extension receives a lot of intercom calls m When outside calls come through a receptionist and are transferred to the extension m When an extension has a private line Lines Ext X ANS ACH Figure 4 3 Personal Answering Machine To Use m Go to the machine to manually retrieve messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code m From outside the system call in and have someone transfer you to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code Or call in when no one will answer before the answering machine does To Program 1 Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to the desired ring Immediate Delayed or No Ring 2 If the lines assigned to extension X are also assigned to other extensions adjust the answering machine to answer on the third or fourth ring so that it does not answer calls before someone else can I
83. to an R3 1 206 module and the control unit is equipped with an R3 1 processor module If the problem is not solved call the AT amp T Helpline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 5 Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Ringer equivalents are too high for the extension What to do Be sure the total of the two devices Ringer Equivalence Numbers REN does not exceed 2 0 If it does unplug one of the devices m f the phone works properly the problem is the REN was too high m If the phone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Auxiliary device such as a fax answering machine or modem is faulty What to do Remove the auxiliary device from the extension and plug in an auxiliary device that you know works properly m f the phone works properly the problem is the auxiliary device Replace the auxiliary device m If the phone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Phone is plugged into the wrong jack of the bridging adapter What to do Plug the phone into the correct jack see the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide for instructions If an MLS 18D phone is part of the combination make sure the second device is plugged directly into the MLS 18D phone
84. to lift the handset of the system phone Held calls do not ring back at a standard phone ina combination extension To retrieve a held call from the standard phone use Direct Line Pickup Active Line A standard phone s message waiting light will not light when Background Music is playing through the system phone s speaker The ringer equivalence number REN of a standard device or the combined REN of two devices cannot be greater than 2 0 The REN of a System phone is 0 0 Using Telephones Your system provides intuitive operation of basic call handling features plus dial code features that make it easy for users to handle calls flexibly and efficiently from both system and standard phones For more information on a specific feature refer to the feature name in Chapter 5 Basic Call Handling Features The following features are available from both system and standard phones Answering Calls Hold placing a call on hold Transferring Calls passing a call to another system extension making a conference call 3 12 Learning About Telephones Dial Code Features Dial code features are features that you access by dialing a feature code at the telephone keypad From a system phone you can dial Feature or Intercom followed by the two or three digit code or press a programmed Auto Dial button from a standard phone you typically dial followed by the two or three digit code when you
85. turn it off by changing the Music On Hold setting to Not Active until you are able to solve the problem m f you use Music On Hold to broadcast certain copyrighted music or material including songs or other material from radio broadcasts you may be required to obtain the permission of the copyright owner One way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP BMI and or similar performing rights organizations to obtain a license Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system from AT amp T which does not require you to obtain such a license AT amp T disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license if required Valid Entries 1 Active v 2 Not Active Music On Hold 602 5 99 Programming To change the setting of the MUSIC ON HOLD jack 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 2 2 To activate or deactivate the MUSIC ON HOLD jack press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 100 Music On Hold 602 Night Service Button 503 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is on all lines assigned to the phones of the users in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of their normal Line Ringing settings Night Service is useful if you want pho
86. up plug the cord in again m If the phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The telephone is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone and plug the cord into a phone that you know works m lf the replacement phone works the problem phone is faulty Call the AT amp T Helpline to arrange for a replacement m If the replacement phone does not work go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The telephone cord is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the phone and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m lf the phone works the cord is faulty Call the AT amp T Helpline to arrange for a replacement m If the phone does not work and it is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 3 m If the phone does not work and it is not part of a combination extension call the AT amp T Helpline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 3 Problems with Standard Phones Standard Phone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer is turned off What to do Turn on the ringer m If the phone rings the problem is solved m If the phone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2
87. voice messaging system PARTNER MAIL VS which occupies a slot in the control unit or PARTNER MAIL which connects to either 3 or 5 extension jacks Dimensions X Processor Module x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 4 0 Ibs or 1 8 kgs and Weights 206 module X 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 4 5 Ibs or 2 0 kgs approx 400 module x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 4 0 Ibs or 1 8 kgs Backplane amp cover x 19 H x 11 W or 30 5 x 48 3 x 27 9 cm 5 5 lbs or 2 5 kgs MLS 34D phone x 5 3 H x 10 W or 24 6 x 13 5 x 25 4cm 8 1 Ibs or 1 4 kgs MLS 18D phone x 5 H x 6 75 a MLS 12D phone H x 6 75 W or 24 1 x 12 7 x 17 1 cm 2 8 lbs or 1 3 kgs W or 24 1 x 12 7 x 17 1 cm 2 8 lbs or 1 3 kgs W or 24 1 x 12 7 x 17 1cm 2 7 lbs or 1 2 kgs H x 6 75 W or 24 1 x 12 7 x 17 1 cm 2 7 Ibs or 1 2 kgs x 5 H s MLS 12 phone x 5 H x 6 75 x 5 H a MLS 6 phone a MLC 6 or MDC 9000 phone 9 4 D x 3 4 H x 7 W or 23 9 x 8 6 x 17 8 cm 2 8 lbs or 1 3 kgs MDW 9000 phone 9 75 D x 6 H x 4 W or 24 8 x 15 2x 10 1cm 2 25 Ibs or 1 0 kgs MLS CA24 Autodialer 9 7 D x 5 3 H x 3 4 W or 24 6 x 13 5x8 6cm 1 3 lbs or 0 6 kgs Switch Fabric Full digital nonblocking The two devices combined on an extension jack can be a system phone with a standard device or two standard devices DO NOT connect two system phones to the same extension jack If a device lists two RENs use t
88. without using expensive adapters or connectors Standard phones can do many of the things that system phones can do and you can save money by using them in certain situations when a system telephone is not needed Follow these guidelines when using standard phones Use standard phones as power failure backups In the event of a power failure standard phones at extensions 10 16 22 and 28 connect to lines 1 3 5 and 7 respectively for continued operation but system phones will not work You can connect standard phones in combination with system phones at power failure extensions or you can simply keep spare standard phones at those extensions to serve as replacements in case of a power failure To use a system feature press in place of Feature used on system phones followed by its two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For features that use intercom on system phones dial only the two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone Instructions for using these features on standard phones are included in Chapter 5 Feature Reference To use a Speed Dial number press followed by its two or three digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For details see Personal Speed Dial Numbers and System Speed Dial Numbers in Chapter 5 If Call Waiting 316 is assigned to an extension with a standard phone connected users hear a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in to t
89. work Learning About Telephones 3 1 Buttons and Indicators MLS 34D Display Line Programmable Buttons 32 with lights Intercom Buttons 2 Display not on MLS 12 Programmable Buttons 6 without lights Line Programmable Buttons Intercom Buttons 2 The following buttons and indicators appear on system phones Display MLS 34D MLS 18D and MLS 12D only Shows date day and time when phone is idle number dialed when placing a Call extension number and name if programmed calling you or transferring a call to you and duration while_a call is in progress Nhen programming shows settings options and prompts To adjust the MLS 18D display contrast see Volume Control on the next page Line Programmable Buttons Used for outside lines or if no line is assigned on a button for programming telephone or extension numbers or other system features such as Last Number Redial When a line is assigned you can press the line button to make a call on that specific line lights show status of line When a number or feature is programmed you can press the button to dial the number or use the feature The MLS 34D has 32 programmable buttons all with lights the MLS 18D has 16 programmable buttons all with lights the MLS 12D and MLS 12 have 16 programmable buttons 10 with lights the MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones have 4 programmable buttons all with lights Intercom Buttons Press t
90. you set the fax extension to select intercom first and the machine has an auto dial feature program a 9 and one or more pauses if available before each Auto Dial number When manually making a call dial 2 to get an outside line For instructions on how to set the Automatic Line Selection see Chapter 5 Setting Up Fax Machines There are many ways to set up fax machines The following configurations are basic and easy to use m Single fax machine Good for light or moderate fax traffic This basic setup uses a published fax number Good for light fax traffic with no need for a published fax number m Send and receive fax machines Good for high volume fax traffic One machine sends the other receives You can install both a telephone and a fax machine on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide This lets you receive both voice and fax calls on the same line but not at the same time If you pick up the phone and hear a fax signal push the Start button on your fax machine and then hang up If you are using the PARTNER MAIL system s Automated Attendant Service you can program PARTNER MAIL to transfer fax calls to the fax extension or a group of fax extensions automatically Use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify fax extensions If you have multiple fax machines put all of the fax extensions into a single Hunt Group any group 1 6 u
91. 1 Immediate v 2 Not assigned v 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button VMS HUNT SCHEDULE VY Factory setting J Button with lights required Auxiliary Equipment DOORPHONE ALERT EXTENSIONS DIAL 606 p 5 44 DIAL an extension number except a doorphone extension DIAL 1 Notan alert v 2 Doorphone 1 alert 3 Doorphone 2 alert 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 PRESS Next Item to identify another FAX MACHINE EXTENSIONS DIAL 601 p 5 53 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to identify another extension MUSIC ON HOLD p 5 99 extension up to 24 alert DIAL 602 extensions per doorphone DIAL 1 Active v v SSE REIS AA EXTENSIONS p 5 2 DIAL 607 HOTLINE p 5 71 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 603 DIAL 1 Assigned DIAL the hotline extension number 2 Not Assigned v not ext 10 16 22 or 28 PRESS Next Item to assign another DIAL the alerted extension number extension notthe hotline or 7 2 to Vv paging system To remove the hotline and alert SMDR RECORD TYPE p 5 122 PRESS Remove DIAL 608 DIAL 1 AIl calls v 2 Outgoing calls only DOORPHONE 1 E
92. 13 Call Follow Me 5 22 5 24 Call Forwarding at your extension 5 10 5 12 Call handling ringing at another extension 5 25 5 66 15 67 ot ren feature 4 4 all Pic Min Answering machines 4 4 Attendants automated see PARTNER Attendant Authorization Codes see Forced Account Code Entr 307 Call Waiting 316 Calling intercom inside using 5 14 Cid Autodialers Intercom Automated attendant extensions Automated attendants see PARTNER Attendant Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 15 1 Automatic Line Selection 5 16 15 17 ss Automatic VMS Cover 310 5 Auxiliary equipment example setups Glock changing sete decus Sake 127 5 overview CO Line Hunting 5 58 programming for Combination extension with Night Service 4 21 O o problems with 6 6 0 0 using Components system Emm Conference B call making a Conf button Background Music 5 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Wake Up Serv 151 5 Coverage 5 142 5 144 5 146 5 Bells se Credit card ems Bridging calls Cycle programming method 2 15 Busy Lamp Fields BLF feature see Light patterns Index IN 1 D DGC see Direct Group Calling Dial Mode 201 5 32 0 Dial pulse signaling 5 117 Dial tone intercom recall standard phones 3 9 Cid system phones 3 5 O Dia codefeatur
93. 3 _ Est 24 S R e ee o a E tan fe Line 5 Line 6 D o D o a line Line 2 D Recall Dn n E Fax n Line 5 a OND n o n Line f Line 2 Intercom pittercom a V Voume A n D o Q Line 5 ON D Line Intercom Intercom D D s s ia n s D s is n n V Volume A nes 73 n t 15 o n t 19 E st 21 D D MZ 25 pe EZ 27 B Sess Far 29 B st 31 m Line 7 B Ext 70 a o Live 3 a Intercom o Intercom n D ntn de a n Prie o Hane o D Line 3 Line 4 o e a o Ext Speakerphone Warekoee Sehe Co 8 P u Heme Oo o n Line 3 o Lise 4 D D Ext Speakerphone ep 8 Figure 2 5 Programmable Buttons and Labeling Sheets on System Phones Programming 2 21 To program a phone from extension 10 or 11 use the following procedure 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 see The Programming Overlays Jearlier in this chapter for more information 2 To start programming a Press Feature 0 0 The display reads PROGRAM EXT 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 b Press System Program The display reads 10 Enter name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering Centralized Telephone Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 2c c Press System P
94. 31 dial 3 1 4 To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis point m To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat Steps 2 through 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Calling Group Extensions 502 5 27 Conference Calls Description This section explains how to set up conference calls using the Conf button ona system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator in a single call Users can connect both outside and inside parties in a conference call but the call cannot include more than two outside parties Related Features You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties During the conference call any inside party can exit the call at any time simply by hanging up However if an outside party hangs up during a conference call the callers that remain in the conference may hear a dial tone Use to remove the last added outside party from a conference call Considerations Users can use System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial or Auto Dial numbers to add parties to the conference Do not add a busy or ringing ou
95. 5 nes 26 o 27 m 28 ease Gat oo RA ie p Pape Night Seo_ fas 29 Saber MSE _ Mue Line ofc Py feo oth a or Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable a Lino o Line 6 Linn 7 Line 8 m A E n n o B 5 Line B Line 2 o Line 3 Line 4 g tereom g Intercom D n aL o o Figure 2 4 Button Programming for Receptionist s Phone Alternatively the receptionist can use an MLS CA24 Intercom Autodialer for the extensions the receptionist dials most frequently This leaves buttons on the phone free for more features and phone numbers Programming 2 19 Using Telephone Programming There are two ways to program a telephone Centralized Telephone Programming from extension 10 or 11 see below and Extension Programming from a user s own extension see page 2 23 Telephone Models Figure 2 5 illustrates an MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 and MLS 6 phone As you program buttons mark their functions on the phone s labeling sheet see the examples in NOTE An MLS 6 phone only has 4 buttons available for lines If 4 lines are assigned it has no programmable buttons The MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones look just like an MLS 6 phone when you program them centrally Using Centralized Telephone Programming Use Centralized Telephone Programming to program features or store telephone numbers for individual extensions from extension 10 or 11 Most features also can be programmed on a
96. 502 Night Service Group Extension 25504 or I Hunt Group Extension 505 4 20 Using Auxiliary Equipment Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment You can set up modems fax machines and answering machines to receive calls automatically after hours When Night Service is on calls ring immediately at the appropriate extensions so that no human intervention is required to transfer calls to the fax modem or answering machine When Night Service is off you can use the auxiliary equipment lines for normal business purposes so that lines are dedicated to auxiliary equipment only after hours By putting auxiliary equipment in the Night Service Group as described in this section auxiliary equipment can start ringing and answering calls whenever you turn Night Service on In other words the Night Service button at extension 10 acts like a switch turning auxiliary equipment on and off as well as putting the system into Night Service NOTE If you have a voice messaging system turning Night Service on also activates Night Service operation of the voice messaging system Figure 4 11 shows a system with a fax machine and a modem connected to separate extensions Line A is published as the fax line and line B is published as the modem line Figure 4 11 Night Service with Fax Machine and Modem To Use During the day lines A and B do not ring at extensions X and Y When you turn Night Service on calls on line A r
97. 6 pn all of the lines assigned to that extension If Forced Account Code List 409 contains entries the system checks the account code against the list If the account code is on the list line access is allowed if not line access is denied Controlling Calls on Outside Lines When an extension is allowed access to an outside line you can use the following procedures to control calling m Outgoing Call Restriction 401 defines the type of calls inside only local only or inside local and long distance that users can make from all lines available at an extension Outgoing Call Restriction Button 4114 allows the receptionist at extension 10 to quickly change an extension s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting m Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 creates up to four lists of numbers that cannot be dialed After creating Disallowed Phone Number Lists use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more lists to a specific extension m Night Service with System Password 1403 restricts users at extensions in the Night Service group from dialing outside phone numbers except Emergency numbers and Marked System Speed Dial numbers unless the password is entered first Table 2 2 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extension s dialing once it gets an outside line Overriding Dialing Restrictions The following programming procedures provide ways to override all diali
98. 651 a E E 3 652 5 E 653 sse PL y plo 654 Poen s JE M ge 655 68 0 656 e9 0 0 657 seo 658 e a 1 659 2 0 0 L 5 660 ses ooo o y y o 661 p ey UN ee ee se ee a E CC er o o o o e You can dial System Speed Dial codes with a at any time regardless of dialing restrictions placed on your extension System Speed Dial numbers are programmed by the System Manager report problems and suggested revisions to your System Manager o PARTNER Plus Communications System To Dial On a system phone press Feature Code e On a standard phone press Code while receiving intercom dial tone Extension Personal Speed Dial Numbers Name Company Telephone Number To program Personal Speed Dial Numbers see the Quick Reference Code 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 Name Company Telephone Number Glossary E A Account code A code of up to 16 digits that is associated with incoming or outgoing telephone calls Entry of an account code may be optional or forced If entered an account code appears on the call record for a call See also Call report Account Code Entry and Auto Dial button A programmable telephone button that lets you dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button An Auto Dial button can be used to store a feature code a phone number or an account code so that it can be dialed with
99. AIL VS system to install it During normal business hours the PARTNER MAIL VS system uses delayed call handling the receptionist picks up all calls at extension 10 If the receptionist cannot answer within four rings the system routes the call to the PARTNER MAIL VS system where the day menu plays to the caller Outside of business hours when Night Service is activated at extension 10 outside calls are answered directly by the PARTNER MAIL VS system Any user who is in the office can pick up calls before the PARTNER MAIL VS system answers To Program The following list summarizes the PARTNER Plus system programming procedures you use to implement the previous example 1 Usej Group Call Distribution 2206 to assign all outside lines to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group to provide Automated Attendant Service on these lines 2 Use Transfer Return Extension 306 for extensions Z1 and Z2 to ensure that calls transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system return to extension 10 if they are not answered 3 UsejHunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions Z1 and Z2 to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group 4 Set the VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Delayed 5 Setthe VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Always 6 Make sure that a Night Service Button 503 is assigned at extension 10 the receptionist s extension When Night Service is on callers hear the night menu when no one is available to answer their calls 7 Program a Voice Mailbo
100. Allowed Phone Numbers Emergency Phone Numbers and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers override the Disallowed List m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting tor Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls Considerations m Each list entry can include up to 12 digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the Hold button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as a on the telephone display m When a user dials a number that is on a Disallowed List for the user s extension the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal after dialing the part of the number that is stored in the list for example an area code m f you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone numbers in a list you must use Next Procedure Or Prev Proceaure to do so since entering 2 and a three digit code will be considered data for the telephone number Valid Entries Up to 12 digits including 0 9 2 x and Hold any single digit Examples The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for a Disallowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of Programming m Specific Telephone Numbers Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it For example to prevent calls to the local number 555 5678 press 5
101. DIAL a line number 01 12 DIAL 1 Touch Tone v 2 Rotary PRESS Next Item to program another line p 5 32 HOLD DISCONNECT TIME DIAL 203 p 5 70 DIAL a line number 01 12 DIAL 1 Long 450 msec v 2 Short 50 msec PRESS I Next Item to program another ine GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION DIAL 206 p 5 58 DIAL a group number 1 6 7 for VMS DIAL a line number 01 12 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 VMS Line Cover only for hunt group 7 PRESS l Next Item to program another ine LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION DIAL 208 p 5 84 DIAL a line number 01 12 DIAL an extension number 10 33 PRESS Next Item to program another ine PRESS Remove to unassign ownership Bw For Centralized Telephone Programming see previous pages System Features Continued GROUP PICKUP PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom 6 6 DIAL a Pickup Group number 1 4 p 5 66 MESSAGE LIGHT OFF p 5 95 SIMULTANEOUS PAGING p 5 120 PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 0 PRESS left intercom x 71 0 DIAL optional two digit extension number o TOUCH TONE ENABLE p 5 135 LAST NUMBER REDIAL p 5 78 MESSAGE LIGHT ON p 5 97 PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 0 8 PRESS Feature 0 5 PRESS Feature 2
102. Display Extension Transfer Return 306 5 140 External Hotline 311 Extraalerts 4 2 0 mm a OOOO OOOO F FACE Fax Machine Extensions 601 5 53 Fax machines dialing restrictions for 4 14 1 1 example y CETT EE Notify feature programming for transferring calls to Ta TAT E Fax Management buton 4 12 5 53 FCC informationJA1 Cid Feature button 3 2 Cd Featurephones 3 10 1 1 1 j Features call handling dial code speed dialing summary i user programmable Flash 5 114 5 116 Follow Me 5 22 5 24 Forced Account Code Entry 307 5 54 5 55 Forced Account Code List 409 5 56 15 57 1 Forwarding calls 5 22 5 24 400module 1 4 B 6 1 o HEEN G GCD see Group Call Distribution Group Call Distribution 206 5 58 5 59 Group Calling 5 27 5 60 5 62 Group Hunting 5 63 5 65 5 73 5 145 Group Paging 5 60 15 62 i Group Pickup 5 66 15 67 1 1 1 1 Groups Calling Huntj5 63 5 65 5 73 5 74 i Night Service overview 2 10 Paging 5 27 5 60 Pickup 5 66 5 67 5 112 1 1 1 HEEENENM H Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI Helplines Inside front cove l6 1 HFAI see Haos ree Answer on Intercom Hold button 3 2 5 68 5 69 0 0 Hold Disconnect rin ie 5 70 s i
103. Entry Background Music and Call Forwarding Call Follow Me if with lights For more information about programming these features see any of them are programmed on a button Chapter 5 Ringing Patterns System phones have these ringing patterns m An outside call will ring ring ring m An intercom call will ring BEEP ring BEEP ring BEEP If you have a system display phone the caller s extension number and name if programmed will show on the display m A transferred call or an unanswered transferred call that is ringing back at your extension will ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to phones Phones use the ringing patterns described here instead Dial Tones You will encounter two different dial tones when calling with a system phone m Outside dial tone is generated by your local phone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two types of dial tones on a system phone press a line button The dial tone you hear is an outside dial tone To hear an intercom dial tone press intercom Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone Every system
104. Information Speed Dial Form Speed Dial Form This appendix contains a Speed Dial Form to be photocopied and handed out to system users It provides space on which to write System and Personal Speed Dial numbers For instructions on programming and using System and Personal Speed Dial numbers see Chapter 5 We suggest you fill in a photocopy of the form leaving the blank original in the book in case you need to distribute revisions in the future Speed Dial Form D 1 Tis PARTNER Plus Communications System To Dial On a system phone press Feature Code On a standard phone press Code while receiving intercom dial tone System Speed Dial Numbers o o e o o ae e N E o o o o ao Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number Code eq wp p beet ct co 3p t 3 IEEE Ber o bu o eeu G nro mH e 5 l y y 69 0 PL y es e foro jj DENKE sss u lS p 3 Rss eof fore 5 5 Q 5 p Se gol o vurp e qued p 9E suu aem 25 Trini Ep 1 Vat ie si 0 0 7 a pes wp 0 7 Oooo esp a amp ge 0 0 L ry 4 eaf 08 8 opu p qwep dq 1 pee es 1 l e J J QG E ID sae 1 gau qu p sarj sep MN fi e 0 B c a E p sas 5 pesee E e0 lj ses qu y pL
105. J Button with lights required AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY DIAL 304 p 5 15 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next Item to program another extension ABBREVIATED RINGING DIAL 305 p 5 3 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Active 1 ring v 2 Not Active repeated ringing PRESS Next Item to program another extension V TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION DIAL 306 p 5 140 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL number of the extension 10 33 to which call should return if not answered Vv Extension transferring call PRESS Next Item to program another extension v FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY DIAL 307 p 5 54 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another extension DISTINCTIVE RING DIAL 308 DIAL an extension number 10 33 1 ActiveY 2 Not Active PRESS Next Item to program another extension p 5 42 DIAL INTERCOM DIAL TONE DIAL 309 DIAL an extension number 10 33 p 5 75 DIAL 1 Regular v 2 Machine PRESS Next Item to program another extension AUTOMATIC VMS COVER DIAL 310 p 5 18 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next Item to program another extension V EXTERNAL HOTLINE DIAL 311 p 5 51 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Assig
106. List Toll Call Prefix required 12015556666 and 02015556666 Toll Call Prefix not required 2015556666 5 46 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Programming To create an Emergency Phone Number List 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 6 The display reads EmergencyList Entry 2 Select a list entry 01 10 For example to select the third entry press o 3 The display reads EmergencyList 03 Enter the telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter 5 Atthis point m To enter other phone numbers press Next Item to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To change the phone number you just entered press Remove enter the correct phone number then press Enter m To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Emergency Phone Number List 406 5 47 Exclusive Hold F02 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature prevents other extensions from picking up outside calls placed on hold at a specific extension with a system phone Related Features You can use the fixed Hold button to put calls on regular hold any extension can pick up the held call Considerations m You can program an Exclusive Hold button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch m For sys
107. Number Only v SYSTEM PASSWORD DIAL 403 DIAL four digits to set the password p 5 128 DISALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS p 5 37 DIAL 404 DIAL a list number 1 4 DIAL a list entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS Next Item to program another list entry To program another list PRESS Next Procedure Prey Procedure enter a new list number and repeat above steps V DISALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS DIAL 405 p 5 36 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL a list number 1 4 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS l Next Item to assign another is To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBER LIST p 5 46 DIAL 406 DIAL alist entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS Next Item to program another list entry V ALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS P 5 8 DIAL 407 DIAL alist number 1 4 DIAL alist entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entr PRESS Next tem to program another list entry To program another list PRESS next Procedure Prev Procedu
108. PARTNER Plus Communications System Release 4 0 ramming and Use Copyright 1994 AT amp T AT amp T 518 455 224 All Rights Reserved Issue 1 Printed in U S A August 1994 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules For additional FCC information see Appendix C of this book Canadian Emissions Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Industry Canada IC For additional IC information see Appendix C of this book Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Industrie Canada Vous trouverez des renseignements compl mitaires a la annexe C de ce manuel Security Toll fraud the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your company s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf can result in substant
109. Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service and set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate m f you can make a call the problem is solved m If the Dial Mode is already set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting What to do If you were able to make a call without any trouble before find out if someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction 401 for your extension m f someone changed your Outgoing Call Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m f no one changed your Outgoing Call Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Local phone company is not accurately receiving the dialing signals What to do Isolate the problem Use the telephone to make calls on different lines Then make calls on different phones using the same line m f you cannot make calls from one phone on all lines follow the procedure for System Phone Does Not Work Possible Cause 2 m f you cannot make calls using different phones go to Possible Cause 5 In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 7 Possible Cause 5 Too many standard devices are trying to dial simultaneously If the problem is o
110. Spkr When the line is free and your phone beeps lift the handset and dial the number If more than one person reserves a line all their phones beep when the line is free The first person to pick up the phone after the beep gets the line and the other reservations are canceled Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial 2 to get an outside line You hear outside line dial tone Dial the phone number If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you may also need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the PBX or Centrex system 5 90 Making Calls To make an outside call on a specific line Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 1 2 3 Dial plus the two digit line number Dial the phone number How to Make an Intercom Call An intercom call or inside call is a call between two extensions without using an outside line There are two ways you can signal the extension you are calling by ringing or by voice System Phone You can lift the handset or press Spkr before dialing then 1 Press an idle intercom button red and green lights are both off You hear intercom dial tone and the light next to the Intercom button is steady green To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number or To voice signal a system phone at the extension press x plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of th
111. TTTTTTT111111111111 111 LL LITT Contents n 0 C FCC Information cal n X 0o 0 0 0 0 0 D Speed Dial Form D 1 LL amp i GL Glossary IN Index ed n 7 7 7 9 9 0 09 Programming Quick References About This Guide Purpose This guide is intended for the system manager It explains what the PARTNER Plus Communications System can do provides instructions for programming and using the system and tells how to get the most out of its many features and capabilities Terminology Throughout this guide the PARTNER Plus Communications System is referred to simply as the system and AT amp T telephones specifically designed to work with the system are called system phones You can also use industry standard telephones with the system which are referred to as standard phones in this guide Finally the PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System which you may have connected to the system is referred to as the voice messaging system How to Use This Guide For information on the following topics refer to the appropriate chapter m Getting Acquainted Chapter 1 provides an overview of system features and hardware components M Programming the System You can change your system s settings easily to accommodate new or ER provides general programming information while provides detailed instructions for programming specific system features m Training Co Workers Chapter 3 expla
112. To assign or unassign Automatic Extension Privacy press Next Data until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 15 Automatic Line Selection Description This Telephone Programming procedure determines the line a user is connected to after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker to make a call The system looks for lines in the order specified by this procedure and selects the first available line For example if you specify outside lines first for an extension but all outside lines are busy the user will hear the intercom dial tone after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker Related Features m To copy the Automatic Line Selection setting as well as other system settings to other extensions you can use Copy Settings 399 m lIf Forced Account Code Entry 4307 is assigned to an extension Automatic Line Selection for that extension does not apply This means the user must manually select a line after entering a required account code m For an extension identified as an Hotline 603 or Doorphone Extension 604 605 program the extension to select only the intercom with no outside lines in the selection sequence m For an extension identified as an External Hotline 311 progra
113. XTENSION V DIAL 604 p 5 45 DIAL an extension number 12 15 18 21 24 27 or 30 33 poe 609 J To remove the doorphone extension PRESS Remove DOORPHONE 2 EXTENSION DIAL 605 p 5 45 DIAL an extension number 12 15 18 21 24 27 or 30 33 To remove the doorphone extension PRESS Remove System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE PRESS ee TT PRESS Featwe 0 0 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SETTINGS PRESS Next Procedure or Prev Procedure PRESS Next Data or Prev Data E A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE PRESS System Program 0 HSE JA SPECIFIC PROCEDU NOTE Procedures 399 609 TO RETURN TO FACTORY PRESS System Program DIAL 4 and three digit procedure code and 728 shown below in dashed SETTING Example 2 1 0 1 for System Date Doxes are skipped when cycling PRESS Remove Dialing Restrictions and Permissions PY y A OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION DIAL 401 p 5 105 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 No Restriction 2 Inside intercom Only 3 Local intercom and local Only PRESS next Item to program another extension V TOLL CALL PREFIX p 5 134 DIAL 402 DIAL 1 0 1 plus Area Code and Number v 2 Area Code and
114. a call It begins when the handset is lifted out of the cradle and ends when either the handset is placed back in the cradle or the call is placed on hold This is not the call duration reported to SMDR SMDR records the total time the call is in progress including the time a call is placed on hold For more information refer to Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 When a call is transferred the timer restarts when the call is answered m The call timer replaces the current time of day display on MLS 34D and MLS 12D phones The MLS 18D displays the call timer in addition to the default display m Most messages other than the default display display for approximately 15 seconds m Marked System Speed Dial numbers do not display when they are dialed m The display contrast on the MLS 18D system phone can be adjusted by pressing x and then using the up volume control button to increase the brightness or the down volume control button to decrease the brightness Adjust the contrast while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle Volume level bars appear in the display on the MLS 18D when the volume or display contrast is adjusted 5 40 Display Display Language 7303 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the language in which display messages appear if the extension has a system display phone The language is set for each extension so phones in the same system can display diffe
115. all 2 If HFAl is on and you are already on a call you will not receive any voice signaled calls to your extension they will ring instead 3 If you make a voice signaled intercom call to a busy extension you may initiate a voice interrupt on busy call to that extension See Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls on the next page for more information 3 6 Learning About Telephones Voice Interrupt on Busy Calls A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets you interrupt and speak to another user who is busy on a call and who has the Voice feature activated for that user s phone When you use Voice Interrupt on Busy the interrupted user hears two beeps before hearing your voice Be aware that the third party to whom the interrupted user is speaking will probably hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Therefore the message you deliver with the interruption should be brief and discreet If the interrupted user wants to answer you he or she can press a programmed Talk Back button the interrupted user s response cannot be heard by the third party in this case Speakerphone Performance Tips The speaker on your MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D or MLS 12 telephone has a sensitive sound activated switch Room acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the speakerphone To ensure that your speakerphone works effectively follow these guidelines m Avoid placing your phone in ar
116. all Prefix not required 800 Programming To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 2 Zz Atthe List No prompt enter a list number 1 4 For example to select the first list press 1 Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 For example to select the first entry press o 1 Atthe Data prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter At this point m To enter other phone numbers in this list press Next Item and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To change the phone number you just entered press Remove and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove m Tocreate another list press Next proceaure Prev Procedure and go to Step 2 Select another procedure using Next Procedure or Prev Procedure or exit programming mode Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 5 9 Answering Calls Description This section describes how users can answer calls ringing at their own extensions Additional features enable users to pick up calls at other extensions see Related Features below Related Features m A user can join a call in progress at another extension as long as is not on for that extension see Joining Calls m A user can answer an outside call an intercom call or a t
117. allers on hold at a feature phone will not hear the system music on hold 5 68 Hold Using System Phone To put a call on hold press Hold J The light next to the line or intercom button winks green To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Press the line or intercom button next to the winking green light 2 Ifthe handset is in the cradle lift it up or press Spkr You are reconnected with the held call The light next to the line or intercom button changes from winking to steady green To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold press the button next to the winking red light or press intercom amp 8 and the two digit line number Standard Phone To put a call on hold press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone The call is on hold Do not hang up the handset while the call is on hold If you hang up the handset the phone rings Lifting the handset reconnects you with the held call To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Hang up The call rings back 2 Liftthe handset You are reconnected with the held call To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold 1 Liftthe handset 2 Atintercom dial tone dial 8 4 and the two digit line number To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The call you are on is placed on hold and you are connect
118. alling Group have standard MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phones those extensions are not signaled at all for voice paged calls to the group If a Calling Group is in use a user attempting to page that group hears a busy tone If a user leaves the microphone on for hands free answer on intercom HFAI the microphone is turned off when that phone receives a group page the user must lift the handset or press Mic to answer the page Exclude extensions that connect auxiliary equipment PARTNER Attendants voice messaging systems fax machines internal and external hotline phones and doorphones from Calling Groups Calls can be transferred to a Calling Group manually or using a button programmed to ring the Calling Group You can program a Group Calling button on a system phone to ring or page a specified Calling Group or to transfer a call to a Calling Group with one touch Here are some useful applications for this feature Group page employees for general announcements this feature is an inexpensive alternative to a paging system Remember to install system phones with built in speakers all models except the MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 where you want employees to hear announcements Put the extensions of people with similar responsibilities in a Calling Group so when a caller needs to talk with anyone in the group the receptionist can transfer the call to the group instead of making separate intercom calls 5 60 Grou
119. ally extension 10 Programming 2 11 Hospitality Features The following hospitality features are for special applications such as the Bed and Breakfast and Hotel Motel industries With both features the receptionist at extension 10 optionally can use the Intercom Autodialers to specify an extension m Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 lets you program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to change an extension s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting without entering System Programming mode For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the No Restriction setting of the guest room phone to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out m Wake Up Service Button 115 lets you program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up or reminder calls for specified system extensions Using System Programming System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole or for individual lines or extensions You can also use System Programming to set up dialing restrictions define groups or set up auxiliary equipment Refer to the filled out System Planner when you are changing system settings and be sure that any changes in programming are recorded there The Programming Overlays System Programming requires a programming overlay placed over the dial pad of the MLS 34D MLS 18D or MLS 12D system phone at extension 10 o
120. ame Display 5 49 Programming To assign a name to an extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press 1 2 Press left intercom For extension 12 the display reads 12 Enter Name If a name was previously assigned to this extension it displays instead Enter the two digit code for each character you want to enter See Table 5 1 for codes For example to enter the name Andy press 2 1 6 2 2 1 2 3 The display reads 12 ANDY If you make a mistake you can press mic to clear the display Repeat Step 4 to enter the correct name Program a button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 50 Extension Name Display External Hotline 7311 Description This procedure does not apply to system phones This System Programming procedure identifies an external hotline extension When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline a predetermined outside number is dialed automatically The external hotline number might be for example a frequently called service bureau The external hotline must be a standard phone not a system phone After you identify an external hotline extension you must also store the external hotline phone number as Personal Speed Dial code 80 for the hotline extension Both procedures are included
121. and equipment restrictions apply However equipment dialing permissions will not override PBX or Centrex system restrictions Speed Dial and Auto Dial Numbers When you program numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system as Speed Dial and Auto Dial numbers include the PBX or Centrex system dial out code 9 on most PBX or Centrex systems followed by one or more pauses in the stored number System Programming Options This section discusses programming options that involve multiple procedures such as dialing restrictions and auxiliary equipment settings as well as features that can be used throughout your system such as Speed Dialing You can use a combination of programming procedures to set up your system to operate most efficiently taking into account your company s telephone service personnel and equipment as well as the special needs of particular departments This section lists the procedures you can use for details on using a particular procedure refer to the procedure name in Speed Dialing You can program up to 100 frequently dialed phone numbers such as numbers for suppliers repair services customers so that all users in the system can dial them by pressing four buttons Feature or on a standard phone plus a three digit code These are called System Speed Dial Numbers Dialing Restrictions and Permissions The system has several procedures for restricting telephone use and several for overriding tho
122. and system phones without a programmed VMS Cover button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 5 18 Automatic VMS Cover 310 Programming To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension 4 Press Feature 0 0 System Program 3 1 0 The display reads AutoVMS Cover Extension 2 Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging system For example to program extension 11 enter 1 1 3 Toassign or unassign Automatic VMS Cover press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic VMS Cover 310 5 19 Background Music F 19 Description This feature is available only on MLS model system phones This feature provides background music through the speaker of an idle MLS model system phone for a user s work area Background Music plays the recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source Related Features Background Music is available only if Music On Hold 602 is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module Considerations If you use the Background Music feature to broadcast certain copyrighted music or material including songs or ot
123. andard single line rotary or touch tone telephones including feature phones with built in feature buttons and lights with the system This guide refers to such telephones as standard phones AT amp T certified standard phones are recommended The following AT amp T phones can make use of the system s message waiting capability m 2500 YMGL Single Line Analog Telephone Set m 2500 YMGK Single Line Telephone with Message Waiting Light and Recall Button m 8101 Analog Telephone m 8102 Analog Telephone m 8110 Analog Telephone m 7102 Plus Analog Voice Terminal Check with your local AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out if other standard phones with message waiting lights will work NOTE For message waiting capability you must connect standard phones with LED compatible message waiting lights to Release 3 1 R3 1 or later 206 modules and equip the system with an R3 1 or later processor module This message waiting capability does not apply to standard phones with neon type message waiting lights 1 6 Overview Auxiliary Equipment You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system without expensive adapters or additional phone lines Many industry standard single line devices will work with the system regardless of the manufacturer W Touch tone rotary and cordless telephones such as those you might have in your home m Fax machines m Answering machines m Modems m Credit c
124. answered until the transfer originator hangs up Valid Entries 0 9 0 rings no return 4 v Programming To change the number of times a transferred call rings before returning to the transfer return extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 0 5 2 Enter a different setting 0 9 For example to set a Transfer Return of 5 rings press Next Data until the display reads Transfer Return 5 Rings 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Rings 105 5 141 VMS Cover F 15 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system and is available only on system phones This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn VMS Cover on and off routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for their extension to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after the specified number of rings factory setting is 3 rings Related Features m f Automatic VMS Cover 310 is Assigned to an extension that extension normally is covered by the voice messaging system For greater flexibility the user can use this feature to program a VMS Cover button to turn coverage on and off as needed Once a VMS Cover button is programmed the user must use the button to turn VMS Cover on and off even though Automatic VMS Cover 310 is Assigned m VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned
125. ar two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If you hear a second set of beeps the recipient has ended the voice interrupt on busy call In either case hang up to end your part of the voice interrupt on busy call m Ifyou hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until Someone answers 5 148 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F 18 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets you program a button that is used to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call while you are active on another call Related Procedures You must use Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 to identify extensions that can receive an intercom call while busy on another call Considerations Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back must be programmed on a button with lights This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights Programming To program a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights
126. ard scanners There are several other devices that may be compatible with the system For more information refer to the list in chapter alot contact your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer Also sao Chapter dlior advice on setting up auxiliary equipment to work effectively with the system Requirements An industry standard device must meet the following conditions m t must be non proprietary That is it cannot be made specifically for use on a particular telephone system For example you cannot connect an AT amp T MERLIN system phone because it is specifically designed for use on a MERLIN system m ts Ringer Equivalence Number REN cannot be greater than 2 0 The REN is shown on a label on the device usually on the bottom m You can connect a standard two line device to the system but for best results it should be installed and used as if it were a single line device Connecting Standard Devices You can connect a standard device so that it is on an extension by itself or so that it shares an extension with another piece of equipment either another standard device or a system phone as long as the REN of the two devices together does not exceed 2 0 System phones have 0 0 REN For example you can connect a standard phone and an answering machine to the same extension An extension with two devices connected to it is called a combination extension You cannot connect two system phones on one extension T
127. assigned to a phone Related Features m lfaline is idle users cannot access it with this feature they hear busy tone For information on accessing an idle line see Direct Line Pickup ldle m If Line Access Restriction 302 is set to No Access or Out Only for a line assigned to an extension a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to answer a call on that line which is ringing at another extension but the user can join a call or access a held or transferred call on the line m Direct Line Pickup cannot be used to access an active call at an extension that has Privacy activated or that is part of a Conference Call or a held call at an extension that used Exclusive Hold Considerations W Users cannot access conference calls using this feature m You can program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button on a system phone to pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two digit line number m This feature is useful when you are requested or paged to pick up a call on a specific line that does not appear on your phone Programming To program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press left intercom 6 8 5 Program another button for this extension or e
128. at the owner s extension before it is sent to the voice messaging system m Users with VMS Cover turned on can Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox by activating Do Not Disturb Considerations m Only one owner can be assigned to a specific line However multiple lines can be assigned ownership to the same extension m This feature provides an alternative method of routing outside calls to the voice messaging system for Call Answer Service m This feature has no effect on the CO Line Ownership procedure in PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS Valid Entries Line number 01 12 Extension number 10 33 No lines owned by an extension v Programming To change the Line Coverage setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 0 8 2 Enter the number of the desired line For example to program line 12 enter 1 2 3 Enter the number of the extension to be assigned ownership of the line For example to program extension 11 enter 1 1 4 Atthis point m To delete the current setting press Remove m To program another line press Next Item Or Prev Item until the correct line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 84 Line Coverage Extension 208 Line Ringing Description This Telephone Programming procedure determines how each outside line assigne
129. atch to be successful the user must dial at least the account code s associated list entry even though the user can dial up to 16 digits for an account code If the system identifies a match the user can dial an outside number If no match occurs the user is denied access to an outside line and must re enter a valid account code to dial out Each list entry can include up to six digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the Hoia button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display Valid Entries Up to 6 digits including 0 9 and Hoia any single digit Examples Expanded Account Codes Users can enter more than the required digits for an account code for tracking purposes For example a Customer Service Department s account code is 123 Representatives in the department must dial at least 123 to get an outside line but can enter additional digits to track a specific customer or item number The following entries are valid 123 123999 The following entries are invalid 1 12 5 56 Forced Account Code List 409 Programming Wildcard Characters You can use wildcard characters in list entries For example your company s Sales Department has a three digit account code the first digit represents the department and the second and third digits represent the individuals in the department You enter 4 as the list entry The following entries are valid
130. c 2 22 Programming To change the settings for another extension press Central Tel Program then dial the new extension number To exit programming mode you can press Feature a o or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press Central Tel Program then System Program To move back to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program Using Extension Programming Users can program features or store numbers on buttons from their own phones using Extension Programming Keep in mind the following exceptions m Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing always must be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming m fa user has a standard phone Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming m lfauserhas a standard phone or a non display system phone Extension Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming To program at the extension use the following procedure d To start programming dial Feature o o Buttons on which lines are assigned for the extension light up to show the
131. cal surges System phone two AT amp T IROB protectors Standard device one AT amp T IROB protector plus one carbon block protector System phones AT amp T SYSTIMAX Bulk Nonplenum DIW cable AT amp T SYSTIMAX Bulk Plenum HALAR HALAR cable or at least 2 pair 4 wire star home run not loop Other standard telecommunications equipment single line phones fax machines answering machines etc 1 pair 2 wire mounting cords AT amp T D2R mounting cords recommended Bridging adapter AT amp T 267F2 Range 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices Safety U S Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Requirements Canada Meets CSA C222 225 a All other countries Meets IEC950 Second Edition and EN60950 Second Edition Government U S FCC Part 68 Approvals and FCC registration number U S AS5 USA 61630 KF E Local Phone FCC Part 15 Class A Company REN outside line jack 0 9A per line jack Information Jack type RJ11C Loop start lines Canada IC CP01 Issue 7 IC registration number Canada 230 3756A IC CS03 Issues 6 amp 7 Load Number 7 Loop start lines Specifications A 3 Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information Maintenance Your system is designed to provide trouble free performance without any special maintenance procedures To reduce the risk of accidental damage m Keep the system modules in an area free of dust smoke and moisture
132. call If Forced Account Code Entry is programmed for an extension the user must enter an account code before accessing an outside line If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List the entered account code must match an entry on that list The Disallowed List then must be assigned to the extension using Disallowed List Assignment 405 Programming 2 9 Setting Up Groups of Extensions You can set up four types of extension groups m Pickup Group Extensions 501 assigns extensions to one of four Pickup Groups A Pickup Group lets any user in the system answer outside calls for any extension in that group m Calling Group Extensions 502 assigns extensions to one of four Calling Groups A Calling Group lets users ring or page all extensions in that group simultaneously or transfer calls into the group Additionally Simultaneous Paging lets users make announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of idle system phones belonging to Calling Group 1 7 Night Service Group Extensions 504 assigns extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is activated at extension 10 calls ring immediately at Night Service extensions regardless of how they ring at other times only the lines assigned to an extension will ring m Hunt Group Extensions 505 assigns extensions to one of seven Hunt Groups Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system A Hunt Group lets users
133. call duration See also Account code and Call report Call report A page of information that begins with a header and lists incoming and outgoing calls to and from your business on a call by call basis See also Call record and Call reporting Call reporting A feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting is also referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR Call Waiting A feature that lets standard phone users receive notification of a second incoming call when they are busy on a call The user can then press the switchhook to put the first call on hold and answer the second call Calling Group A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously by dialing a group calling code See also Calling restriction A feature that lets you control telephone use at specific extensions Centralized Telephone Programming A method of telephone programming that lets you program individual extensions in the system from a System display phone at extension 10 or extension 11 Centralized Telephone Programming is an alternative to Extension Programming CO Line See Line Glossary GL 1 Combination extension An extension that has two devices connected to it Combination extensions can connect two standard devices or a standard device and a system phone but not two system phones Control unit Molded plastic housing made up of a backplane and cover The control unit holds system modules which connect
134. can ring at the system phone while the standard phone is busy but do not use the system phone to answer the second call until the standard phone is idle or the first call will be disconnected Learning About Telephones 3 11 If you make a voice signaled intercom call to a combination extension with a system phone only the system phone signals Call Waiting 22316 does not work on a standard phone in combination with a system phone The lights on the system phone show what the standard telephone is doing as well as what the system phone is doing For an explanation of light patterns see Lights at the beginning of this chapter If Privacy is active at a combination extension no other extension can join a call in progress at either a system phone or a standard device However a phone can interrupt a call on a standard device at the same extension For example if a system phone and modem are combined at an extension picking up the handset of the system phone could interrupt a modem transmission even if Privacy is active While on a call on a standard phone you can use the system phone s dial pad and fixed feature buttons to handle calls For example you can use the system phone to select a specific outside line and conduct the call on the standard phone Or if someone is on a call using the standard phone someone else can put that call on hold by pressing Hoia on the system phone To do this it is not necessary
135. cannot program an MLS 18D The system permits programming from remote locations using Remote Administration Units see Remote Programming later in this chapter This chapter provides general information on programming procedures When a specific feature name is referenced it is printed in bold type For detailed descriptions and step by step instructions refer to that name in Brief summaries of all programming procedures are at the end of this book Programming 2 1 Hardware Considerations Programming procedures use line and extension numbers The line number represents the line jack on a 206 or 400 module to which the outside line is connected Similarly the extension number represents the extension jack on a 206 module to which the system phone or standard device is connected For each 206 module the system assigns two lines and six extensions for each 400 module the system assigns four lines The system numbers lines and extensions consecutively Figure 2 1 shows the numbering scheme for a system with maximum lines Figure 2 2 shows the numbering scheme for a system with maximum extensions However your system can have any number of lines or extensions up to the maximum 206 Modules 400 Modules Line Jacks at at E 1 Line Jacks Extension Jacks Line Jacks 206 Modules Line Jacks T i 2 E ij E i l Line Jacks Extension al so Extension Jacks Figure 2 2 Maximum Exten
136. ce Messaging Systems Two AT amp T voice messaging systems are compatible with your system You can install one or the other depending on your business needs m The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System which physically resembles a 206 module resides in the control unit and provides voice messaging capabilities for up to 10 subscribers An optional Mailbox Expansion Card can extend service for up to 20 subscribers m The PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System is an auxiliary device that connects to the system through extension jacks It is available in a 2 port or 4 port configuration providing service for up to 20 or 40 subscribers respectively Both voice messaging systems offer your business complete call processing features Specifically they can m Insure that incoming calls are answered and directed to destination extensions correctly and efficiently using immediate or delayed call handling Immediate call handling sends calls directly to the voice messaging system while delayed call handling allows the receptionist to answer calls first m Answer and route calls during the day and after normal business hours m Alleviate the problem of inaccurate or incomplete messages by allowing callers to leave detailed confidential messages for subscribers m Allows subscribers to assign a password to their mailbox change their personal greeting and retrieve messages The PARTNER MAIL system also offers advanced voice mail features
137. cted Incoming fax calls on the fax line are answered automatically by fax 2 If a fax comes in on a line other than line A you can transfer the call to fax 2 see Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine earlier in this chapter If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine see Feature earlier in this chapter If fax 1 is set for Delayed Ring on line A fax 1 can pick up fax transmissions when fax 2 does not answer To Program Fax 1 Send Ext X 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first line A selected last 3 Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Delayed Ring set all other lines to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 4304 for extension X to Assigned 5 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 To monitor the fax machine at extension X use 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 17 To Program Fax 2 Receive Ext Y
138. ctive Considerations Receptionists and others who handle many calls quickly often leave Abbreviated Ringing off so they have an audible reminder of incoming calls Abbreviated Ringing works for outside transferred and intercom calls The volume of an abbreviated ring is lower than a normal ring Calls to a busy extension ring at a lower volume than normal even if Abbreviated Ring is set to Not Active Valid Entries 1 Active incoming calls ring once v 2 Not Active incoming calls ring repeatedly Programming To change the Abbreviated Ringing setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 5 The display reads Abbrev Ring Extension Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press 1 2 To set Abbreviated Ringing press Next Data until the appropriate value displays To set Abbreviated Ringing for another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Abbreviated Ringing 305 5 3 Account Code Entry F12 Description This feature can be used only from a system phone This feature lets a user with a system phone enter an account code up to 16 digits for an outside call incoming or outgoing An account code is typically used to identify a departmen
139. ctly gives rise to the claim Except as provided below AT amp T and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any incidental special reliance consequential or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment As used in this paragraph consequential damages include but are not limited to the following lost profits lost revenues and losses arising out of unauthorized use or charges for such use of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through or connected to the equipment For personal injury caused by AT amp T s negligence AT amp T s liability shall be limited to proven damages to person No action or proceeding against AT amp T or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twelve 12 months after the cause of action accrues THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY Maintenance B 3 Product Ordering Information Reference Materials In addition to this guide the following materials are available the order numbers are in parentheses System Planner 518 455 328 provides the forms needed to plan and record how your system and telephones are to be programmed Installation 518 455 222 provides instructions for installing the system Quick Reference for Use with MLS Series Telephones 518 455 327 contains basic instructions for using system phones MLC 6 Cordless Telephone Installation and Troubleshooting 999 506 143 explains how to in
140. d for a call that is left on hold for longer than one minute The tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Hotline phone A standard phone at an extension set to ring another extension automatically when the handset is lifted See also External Hotline Hunt Group A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred calls in round robin fashion Calls to the hunt group are directed to the first available extension in the group with the extension that answered most recently being the last one in the hunt order See also VMS Hunt Group and Calling Group HEN Industry standard device A telephone or other telecommunications device that can be connected directly to the public telephone network See also Proprietary device and Inside call See Intercom call Intercom Autodialer MLS CA24 An auxiliary device that can be connected to the System phones at extensions 10 and 11 The device has Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in the system which can be used for dialing or transferring calls to extensions with one touch o ee Intercom Auto Dial button A button that is programmed to ring or page another extension whenever the button is pressed The button can be used to call the extension or to transfer a call to the extension with one touch the lights next to the button also show calling activity for the extension Intercom call A call that is made to another
141. d check with your local phone company if you are not sure which type of line is being provided to you Related Features m If you are having difficulty using touch tone phones on rotary lines you may need to adjust the Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m lf the system has rotary lines you can use Touch Tone Enable to send touch tone signals over a rotary line for example to access bank by phone services Valid Entries 1 Touch Tone line v 2 Rotary line Programming To change the Dial Mode setting for a specific line 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 0 1 The display reads Dial Mode Line 2 Enter the first line to be programmed For example to program line 8 press 0 s 3 Tochange the dial mode press Nex Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another line press Next Item Or Prev Item until the correct line number shows on the display and repeat Step 3 to change the mode 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all lines that you want to change 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 32 Dial Mode 201 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Description This feature allows users to access a ringing or held call or to join a call in progress on a specific outside line where LL is a line number from 01 12 This feature is useful for picking up a ringing or held call or joining a call on a line that is not
142. d consider when setting up your system to work effectively behind a PBX or Centrex system are discussed below Chapter 5 explains how to use the programming procedures discussed here Recall Setting To set up your equipment to work properly with a PBX or Centrex system first set Recall Timer Duration 107 to match the setting used by your PBX or Centrex system usually 800 msec or 32 This setting affects the length of a Recall signal sent by the control unit to access Centrex services Dialing Restrictions Outgoing Call Restriction 401 is an equipment restriction intended to limit an extension s dialing to inside calls only using the intercom buttons on system phones or to inside and local calls only allowing calls within the PBX or Centrex system and local calls outside the PBX or Centrex system However if users in your system use a dial out code 9 on most PBX or Centrex systems before dialing numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system the equipment will not be able to prevent toll calls for extensions restricted to inside and local calls only unless you use Disallowed Phone Number Lists to prevent dialing to specific classes of numbers 2 6 Programming If your PBX or Centrex system includes dialing restrictions use those instead of the equipment restrictions If you have PBX or Centrex dialing restrictions on a line and also program equipment restrictions both the PBX or Centrex system
143. d to an extension rings A line can ring immediately ring with a 20 second delay or not ring at all Delayed Ring is useful for backup coverage on shared lines such as for secretaries who cover each other s lines No Ring is useful for all extensions except 10 when a receptionist answers all calls or for phones with no regular users such as in conference rooms Related Features To copy the Line Ringing settings as well as other system settings to other extensions you can use Copy Settings 399 Considerations m Program this feature from extension 10 or 11 only using Centralized Telephone Programming Individual users cannot program this feature m System phone users see the light patterns for the lines assigned to their extensions even if Line Ringing is set to Delayed Ring or No Ring m Ifa line at an extension is set to No Ring a user at that extension has to manually select the line to answer a call Valid Entries Immediate Ring v Delayed Ring No Ring Examples m Receptionist Call Routing If you want calls to be answered by the receptionist first set the lines at the receptionist s extension to Immediate Ring and the lines at the users extensions to No Ring Receptionist Backup f you want all calls on a line to ring directly at users extensions with the receptionist providing backup set the line at the users extensions to Immediate Ring Then set the line on the receptionist s extension to Delayed Ring An inc
144. d using this telephone during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak The product is provided with a three wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the AC power supply cord to building surfaces CAUTION DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots and openings They prevent the product from overheating DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Overview Features and Capabilities The following list provides an overview of the system s features Full line of system phones some with displays showing date time and programming and feedback messages All system phones provide access to multiple outside lines and system features Programmable buttons on system phones providing one touch access to system features simply by pressing the button Intuitive operation of basic call handling capabilities including transfer conference and hold Intercom inside calling to other system extensions using an Intercom button and the two digit number assigned to the extension Users can either ring or voice signal an idle system phone or use Voice Interrupt On Busy to signal another user who is active on a call Grouping of extensions for flexib
145. ded only if someone else answers outside calls for your extension when you do not answer them Related Features Users with Automatic VMS Cover 310 Assigned or with VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox Considerations This feature requires a button with lights When the Do Not Disturb feature is on the light is also on indicating that the phone will not ring Use this feature when you do not want the PARTNER Attendant or the voice messaging system to transfer calls to you Use this feature if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and leave your desk so calls to the Hunt Group will skip your extension and ring immediately at the next available extension in the group To avoid missing calls when this feature is not needed turn it off If Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not Disturb active will ring at that extension if they transfer return Programming Using To program a Do Not Disturb button i 2 3 4 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 0 l Program another button for this
146. des only the instructions for Centralized Telephone Programming To program from individual extensions users should refer to their Quick Reference booklets All of the instructions in this chapter assume that system phones select outside lines first and standard phones select intercom first as determined by each extension s setting for Automatic Line Selection See Chapter 2 for a review of the methods and buttons you can use while in programming mode 51 AA Extensions 607 Description This System Programming procedure lets you identify extensions where PARTNER Attendants are connected to the system Doing so lets the system notify users with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the PARTNER Attendant This procedure applies only to PARTNER Attendants do not use it with the Automated Attendant Service of a voice messaging system Related Features m For each PARTNER Attendant extension use Transfer Return Extension 306 to identify the extension to which a call should be routed if the destination extension does not answer m Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Not Assigned for the PARTNER Attendant extension if you want to be able to intercept calls routed to the device Considerations m Chapter 4 provides information on using PARTNER Attendants with the system m On system display phones AA displays when a call is being transferred from a PARTNER Attendant Trans
147. dset Conversely if you are using the speaker and microphone and want to switch to the handset lift the handset and the speaker and microphone will turn off m Use the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature to answer voice signaled calls without lifting the handset see below Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI When you receive a voice signaled intercom call your phone beeps once to indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically and you hear the caller s voice over your phone s speaker If you leave your microphone on all the time you can start talking when you hear the caller without lifting the handset This feature is called Hands Free Answer on Intercom NOTE Since MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones do not have microphones you must lift the handset to answer voice signaled calls to those phones Any user in the system can make a voice signaled call to an idle MLS model phone by pressing Intercom x and then dialing an extension number or pressing an Auto Dial button programmed for voice signaling You can make a voice signaled call from either a system phone or a standard phone However if you try to make a voice signaled call to a standard phone or to an MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone it will ring NOTES 1 The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your phone is idle Muting your voice while you are on a call only turns off the microphone for the duration of the c
148. e or transfer a call to a Calling Group the first extension to pick up the call is connected to the caller This feature is useful for conversing with any individual in a specific group such as a sales pool or for paging all individuals in the group The system can have up to four Calling Groups Related Features m For instructions on making a ringing call or paging call to a Calling Group see Group Calling Ring Page m Users can make simultaneous announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the system phones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Simultaneous Paging Considerations W Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group In addition you can assign all extensions in the system to one group this is especially useful for making paging announcements to all employees m Do not assign extensions that connect auxiliary equipment PARTNER Attendants voice messaging systems fax machines answering machines hotline phones or doorphones or extensions assigned as External Hotline phones to a Calling Group Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Programming To create a Calling Group 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 0 2 2 Atthe Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 For example to select group 1 press 1 3 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension
149. e are installed the system phone continues to use distinctive ringing but all calls ring at the standard device using a single ring burst m The system does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PBX or central office through to extensions regardless of the setting for this feature Valid Entries 1 Active only outside calls use a single ring burst v 2 Not Active outside intercom and transferred calls use a single ring burst Programming To change the Distinctive Ring setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 8 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 22 press 2 2 3 To activate or deactivate Distinctive Ring for the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item Or Prev Item until the correct extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 42 Distinctive Ring 308 Do Not Disturb F01 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from audibly alerting lights still flash When Do Not Disturb is on outside callers hear ringing while inside callers hear a busy signal This feature is recommen
150. e code and another Speed Dial number to dial the account code 5 130 System Speed Dial Numbers Valid Entries Any phone number up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 x and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Hold Pause Mic Stop Sekr Recall and Transfer Touch Tone Enable assigned to codes 600 through 699 No number assigned to any code v Programming To program System Speed Dial numbers 1 Press Feature 0 0 The display reads Program Ext 10 Assign a three digit code to the number by pressing Feature and three digits between 600 and 699 For example to assign code 600 press Feature 6 o o If a number is already assigned to the code it appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code the display reads Blank Enter the number For example to program 555 4757 press 5 5 5 4 z 5 z The display reads 5554757 To mark the System Speed Dial number to override dialing restrictions precede the number by a x For example to mark the number 555 1001 enter x 5 5 8 11 2 o 1 The display reads 5551001 At this point m To program another System Speed Dial number start from Step 2 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the three digit code m Toremove a System Speed Dial number enter the number s three digit code and press mic once
151. e device itself to answer on a later ring when the Line Ringing for the device s extension is set to Immediate Ring or set the extension s Line Ringing to Delayed Ring For a voice messaging system check all the settings associated with it See page 2 11 for a summary of procedures associated with the voice messaging system and Chapter 5 for complete details on each feature If the auxiliary device no longer answers calls automatically the problem is solved m lf the problem remains call the AT amp T Helpline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 8 Troubleshooting Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer Possible Cause 1 If you are using a speakerphone there may be environmental factors that affect the performance of the speaker or microphone for example too much background noise What to do See Speakerphone Performance Tips in Chapter 3 for suggestions on the proper use of the speakerphone If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 If the system is set for rotary dialing the Rotary Dialing Timeout interval is too long If the system is set for touch tone dialing you may have a faulty phone or cord See System Phone Does Not Work What to do Reset the interval using Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m If you can hear the called party answer the problem is solved m If the
152. e following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking will probably also hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until Someone answers Making Calls 5 91 Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Toring the extension dial the two digit extension number or To voice signal a system phone at the extension press x plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses m f you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply m If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the b
153. e it is sent to the owner s voice mailbox Display Language 2303 to specify the language English French or Spanish for messages that appear on a system display phone Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a call at the extension This feature is also useful for extensions connected to a modem fax or any device whose function can be disrupted by someone trying to join it Forced Account Code Entry 2307 to prevent the extension from making an outside call until a required account code is entered You can also use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes Call Waiting 316 to identify standard phone extensions that can receive system not local telephone company call waiting tone for a second incoming call when active on a call Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to prevent the extension from making certain types of outgoing calls on all system lines Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more Disallowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of outside numbers that extensions cannot dial Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more Allowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Pickup Group Extensions 2501 Calli
154. e nearest AT amp T Authorized Dealer check your local telephone directory s yellow pages Table B 1 Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacement Parts U S Maintenance B 7 FCC Information Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will have to correct the interference at his or her own expense NOTE References to FCC regulations in this appendix are not applicable outside of the U S FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following m Means of Connection Connection to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C These USOCs must be ordered from your local telephone company FCC compliant line cords are provided with Line and L
155. e or exit programming mode 5 126 System Date 101 System Day 102 Description This System Programming procedure sets the day of the week that appears on system display phones Valid Entries 1 Sunday v 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday Programming To change the System Day 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 0 2 2 Change the day by entering a new setting number as listed in Valid Entries above For example to set the day to Tuesday press Next Data until the display reads System Day 3 Tue 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Day 102 5 127 System Password 403 Description This feature is available only on MLS model phones This System Programming procedure defines a four digit password that users can enter from MLS model phones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Related Features m The password overrides all dialing restrictions but not Line Access Restriction 302 m Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Service on or off Additionally if Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers Dialing restrictions for extensions no
156. e other party When voice interrupt on busy is initiated the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator s voice The originator and the recipient should be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking will probably hear both the beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice This feature typically is used by the receptionist to alert the boss of an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call Related Features m Making Calls and Transferring Calls provide more instructions for making and transferring voice interrupt on busy calls The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back button to respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The recipient s response will not be heard by the third party Users cannot receive voice interrupt on busy calls if Do Not Disturb is active at their extension They are part of a joined call Joining Calls They are part of a Conference Call Considerations The voice interrupt on busy tone two beeps is unique to distinguish it from a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep If a voice interrupt on busy call is made to an idle extension then the originator and the recipient hear a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep instead If you receive a voice interrupt on busy call and press Hold the third party is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have ended the v
157. e system phone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To transfer a call to a Hunt Group manually 1 2 While on a call press Transfer Dial z z and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Standard Phone To ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial z z and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press x z z and a group number 1 6 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone Dial z z and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is prog
158. e while a call is on hold Related Features m System phone users can use Exclusive Hold to put calls on hold that can be retrieved only from their own extension m Standard phone users can put a current call on hold to retrieve a second call provided Call Waiting 4316 is programmed for their extensions m Callers on hold hear Music On Hold 2602 only if it is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module Considerations m For system phones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up m Only one party on an intercom call can put the call on hold If both parties try to put the call on hold the call is disconnected m f you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call hold feature that lets you place a call on hold and place another call on the same line For more information see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead m Hold acts differently on feature phones When you press a Hold button on a feature phone the call is held at the phone itself This means other phones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line Also c
159. eas with high background noise caused by loud voices radios printers copiers typewriters other noisy office equipment and heater and air conditioning fans m Avoid rustling papers near the microphone lower right corner of your phone m Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking When you both talk at the same time only one person s voice comes through m Do not use your speaker to make announcements over a loudspeaker paging system connected to your phone system m When talking always face your phone and stay within two feet of it m Place your phone at least six inches away from the edge of your desk m If you have difficulty hearing the other party try increasing the speaker volume If you have background noise try turning off the microphone when the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak If the difficulty persists lift your handset to continue the conversation m n conference rooms a separate speakerphone such as the AT amp T S203 Speakerphone is recommended since the built in speaker on a system phone is designed for individual use Learning About Telephones 3 7 Standard Telephones In addition to system phones you can connect industry standard touch tone or rotary dial phones and even some feature phones which have built in calling features directly to the system You can also combine standard phones on the same extension with system phones or other devices
160. ected Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturer its authorized agents or by others who may be authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this equipment please contact the AT amp T Helpline at 1 800 628 2888 For warranty information see Appendix B m Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service Hearing Aid Compatibility All system phones are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC C 2 FCC Information IC Notification and Repair Information The Industry Canada IC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The IC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that is
161. ed above refer to the printer s instructions if you need help Call Accounting Devices You can send call information to a call accounting device such as AT amp T s Call Accounting Terminal Basic or Plus if you want to further analyze call activity The device stores rate table information and processes the information it receives into meaningful reports that can help you optimize your communications system For example you can use it to determine the best combination of local and long distance lines for your business The call accounting device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the processor module and can also print out reports that include summaries by hour line and extension Refer to the manual provided with the call accounting device for instructions on connecting it to your system 4 10 Using Auxiliary Equipment Credit Card Scanners Many retail businesses and restaurants use credit card scanners to get instant approval of credit card purchases The system allows your credit card scanners to share the lines in your system as shown in Figure 4 5 You can install the credit card scanner on an extension by itself or combine it with a system phone or a standard phone on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide Teleph Lines ial ae Figure 4 5 Credit Card Scanner To Use When you make a call on the credit card scanner an outs
162. ed to another extension resetting the system turns off Call Forwarding if the feature is programmed on a button with lights the reset also turns off the light for the Call Forwarding button m You annot interrupt the reset process or use any telephones in the system during the reset process Using To reset the system Press Feature 2 2 System Program System Program z 2 8 The display reads Reset Save All When the reset is completed the system is no longer in programming mode and the date and time appear on the display If a power failure has occurred the time may not be correct change it using System Time 103 System Reset Programming Saved 728 5 129 System Speed Dial Numbers Description This feature lets you program a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers for the system Anyone on the system can then dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing Feature or 2 at intercom dial tone on a standard phone and the three digit code from 600 through 699 You can mark System Speed Dial numbers to override dialing restrictions Related Features System Speed Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing four buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing a single button For instructions on entering special characters such as Pause in a number see Special Dialing Functions Individuals can have up to 20 additional Personal Sp
163. ed to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again You can continue to press the switchhook to move back and forth between the two calls Hold 5 69 Hold Disconnect Time 203 Description This System Programming procedure lets you change the hold disconnect time for an outside line When a caller on hold hangs up the local telephone company may send a special signal to the system to free the line There are two possible signals a long signal 450 milliseconds used by most telephone companies or a short signal 50 milliseconds used by a few telephone companies The length of the signal is called the hold disconnect time If you put a call on hold and the caller hangs up but the call does not disconnect within a minute after the caller hangs up use this procedure to change the hold disconnect time Considerations If the telephone company does not send a signal keep the hold disconnect time set to Long Users must disconnect held calls manually by retrieving the call then hanging it up Change the hold disconnect time only if abandoned calls on hold do not disconnect Valid Entries 1 2 Long 450 msec v Short 50 msec Programming To change the hold disconnect time 1 Press Feature 2 2 System Program System Program 2 2 3 I The display reads HoldDisconnct Line Enter the first line to be programmed For example to program line 2 press
164. eed Dial Numbers for use on their own phones You can store account codes as System Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature Considerations To program System Speed Dial numbers that override dialing restrictions mark them by entering a star x before the phone number System Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed onto Auto Dial buttons System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed only from extension 10 or 11 but can be used from any extension Refer to a completed System Speed Dial form for the list of numbers to be programmed After programming the numbers distribute a copy of the completed form to users See for a blank form If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code and one or more pauses if available in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system If you program 911 or other emergency numbers as Speed Dial numbers and want to place test calls you should 1 perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening and 2 remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number to dial the Account Code Entry featur
165. eeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking will probably also hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response m f you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers 5 92 Making Calls Manual Signaling F 13XX or F 13 XX Description This procedure applies only to MLS model phones This feature lets you program a button on your MLS model phone that you can use to signal a predetermined co worker s extension with a beep It is typically used by a receptionist to alert a user when the user is busy on another call In addition to beeping you can use a Manual Signaling button to intercom ring or voice signal the user at the target extension Related Features m Voice Interrupt on Busy 312 is an alternative feature that lets a user signal then speak to a user who is active on a call m You can use the Manual Signaling button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Follow Me Message Light On Message Light Off Considerations m AnMLS model phone is required at both extensions to use this feature m You must program the Manual Signaling feature code on a button al
166. eir extensions so calls hunt immediately to the next available extension m For instructions on making outside calls ring directly in a Hunt Group see Group Call Distribution 206 m Hunt Group calls are not eligible for VMS Cover Related Features for Hunt Group 7 m This Hunt Group only applies to the voice messaging system For more information see m After you assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 you should set the 306 for those extensions to extension 10 or another extension with a receptionist who can assist the caller Considerations for Hunt Groups 1 6 m Any number of extensions can be assigned to each Hunt Group In addition extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group m You can include multiple fax machines or answering machines in a Hunt Group m If you have a PARTNER MAIL system and multiple fax machines you can assign the fax machines to a Hunt Group Then you can program the PARTNER MAIL system so that when an automatic fax call comes in ona line covered by the PARTNER MAIL s Automated Attendant Service the PARTNER MAIL system recognizes that it is a fax call and automatically transfers it to the first available fax machine in the group Hunt Group Extensions 505 5 73 Considerations for Hunt Group 7 This Hunt Group is used exclusively for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware Do not assign any other exte
167. em Programming requires a system display phone and must be done from extension 10 or 11 HEN T Talk Back See Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Telephone Programming Customizes extensions to meet the needs of individual users including the assignment of features to programmable buttons Telephone Programming can be done either centrally or from the user s own extension See also Centralized Telephone Programming and Extension 200 module The AT amp T equipment component that has line jacks for connecting up to two outside lines to the control unit 206 module The AT amp T equipment component that contains jacks for connecting up to two outside lines and up to six extensions to the control unit Glossary GL 5 HEN V Verification of Account Codes See Forced Account Code Entry VMS Voice Messaging System See Voice messaging system VMS VMS Hunt Group Hunt Group 7 reserved by the system to identify extensions that are associated with the voice messaging system hardware See also Group Call Distribution and Hunt Group Voice Interrupt On Busy A special intercom call that lets a user interrupt and speak to another user who is busy on a call See also Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back A feature that lets the recipient of a voice interrupt on busy intercom call respond to the originator of that call See also Voice Interrupt On Busy Voice Mail coverage A voice messag
168. ension If an autodialing device such as a modem has trouble autodialing use Intercom Dial Tone 309 t0 change the intercom dial tone for the extension to Machine outside line dial tone Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 3 Answering Machines You can use an answering machine to answer calls at night when no one is around or during business hours when no one can get to the phone If you have an AT amp T answering machine with the Call Intercept feature you can pick up a call that has been answered by the answering machine by joining the call from any system phone When you do so the system sends the answering machine a signal that makes it hang up The following are ways you can connect answering machines to your system m Single answering machine This basic setup can cover all the lines in the system Anyone on the system can call the machine to retrieve messages m Multiple answering machines lf you get too many calls for one machine to cover connect two or more machines to cover all calls m Personal answering machine An answering machine can share an extension with a phone to answer calls to the extension NOTE If you have an answering machine and a system phone on the same extension the answering machine will be able to answer calls only when the phone is idle 4 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment Single Answering Machine The single answering machine setup Figure 4 1 serves the entire system The answeri
169. entralized Telephone Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO PRESS Feature Lo 2 AT THE SAME EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON After you program one feature continue with PRESS the programmed button PRESS System Program System Program Central Tel Program the instudlions in the box for the next feature PRESS P j Mic DIAL the extension number to be programmed TO CHANGE SETTING FOR Buttons on which lines are assigned for the extension light ANOTHER EXTENSION ae oa MODE up to show the current Line Ringing setting remaining Feature o 0 buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or PRESS Central Tel Program features DIAL the new extension s number NOTE Program Automatic Line Selectionor Extension Nahe Display first PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS p 5 110 PRESS Feature DIAL he poe Mu dame to 28 digi DIAL a two digit code cool Spal 80 99 AUTOMATIC LINE SELECTION PRESS x x p 5 16 PRESS the line intercom buttons in the desired order EXTENSION NAME DISPLAY PRESS left Intercom p 5 49 Enter the character codes for the name See Table 5 1 Character Codes on p PRESS x x V Outside lines 01 12 left AUTO DIAL NUMBERS OUTSIDE AND INSIDE p 5 13 Intercom PRESS a programmable butto
170. ephones See MLS Model Telephones See MLS CA24 Intercom Autodialer See Intercom Autodialer MLS CA24 Music on hold system Equipment that lets you play recorded music or messages to callers who are placed on hold A music on hold audio source can be connected to the RCA jack on the processor module in the control unit See al so Background Music HEN Network interface jack A jack generally located in your equipment room that provides access to an outside line coming into your building from your local telephone company A line cord from the network interface jack to a line jack on a 206 or 400 module connects the line to your system Night Service A feature that automatically redirects calls received after hours or when a receptionist is not available to answer calls This feature also activates night service operation of the voice messaging system See also Password GL 4 Glossary HEN Oo One touch Intercom Calling button See Intercom Auto Dial button Outside line SeelLine DEAS P PARTNER Attendant An optional device that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement Password A four digit code assigned by the system manager that users can enter from an MLS model phone to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off See also Night Service Pickup Group A group of extensions for which calls to any extensi
171. er 4 Rings 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 144 VMS Cover Rings 117 VMS Hunt Delay 506 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure determines when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system You can set the system for either immediate call handling after the second ring or delayed call handling after the fourth ring Delayed call handling gives the receptionist an opportunity to answer calls before they go to the Automated Attendant Service Related Features m You must use Group Call Distribution 2206 to assign lines to Hunt Group 7 m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 Valid Entries 1 Immediate v 2 Delayed Programming To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant service 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 0 6 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Hunt Delay 506 5 145 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure determines whether the outside lines assigned to Hunt Grou
172. er return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Related Features Display Language 303 has no effect on this feature This means the extension name displays as it is programmed Considerations m Any extension regardless of the phone type on that extension can be programmed with a name through Centralized Telephone Programming If users want to program their own extension name they must have a system display phone at their extension m Only extension numbers not names are printed on SMDR reports m You should program Extension Name Display when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features If you want to program both Extension Name Display and Automatic Line Selection which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display Valid Entries Up to 12 characters including letters A Z numbers 0 9 and blank spaces See Table 5 1 below for the corresponding codes Table 5 1 Character Codes Letters Numbers A x 21 N 62 blank 11 B 22 0 63 0 00 C 23 P 71 1 10 D 31 Q 72 2 20 E 32 R 73 3 30 F 33 S 74 4 40 G 41 T 81 5 50 H 42 U 82 6 60 43 V 83 7 70 J 51 W 91 8 80 K 52 X 92 9 90 L 53 Y 93 M 61 Z 94 Extension N
173. erence calls with multiple outside parties Considerations You can program a Conference Drop button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch Programming To program a Conference Drop button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press Feature 0 6 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone Press the programmed button or press Feature 0 6 The last added outside party is dropped from the conference Standard Phone Press the switchhook down once rapidly The last added party inside or outside is dropped from the conference 5 30 Conference Drop F06 Copy Settings 399 Description This System Programming procedure copies all of the following settings from one extension to another 301 Line Assignment 302 Line Access Restriction 303 Display Language 304 Automatic Extension Privacy 305 Abbreviated Ringing 307 Forced Account Code Entry 308 Distinctive Ring 309 Intercom Dial Tone 310 Automatic VMS Cover 311 External Hotline 312 Voice Interrupt On Busy 316 Call Waiting Considerations 401 Outgoing Call Restriction 405 Disallowed List Assignments 408 Allowed List Assignments 501 Pickup Group Extensions 502 Calling Group Extensions
174. es If a single answering machine cannot handle all your calls you can set up two or more machines at different extensions Figure 4 2 so that a call does not go unanswered If one answering machine is busy a second call will be answered by the second machine A setup such as this might be used by a movie theater to announce movie times to people calling for information Figure 4 2 Multiple Answering Machines To Use m Go to the machines to manually play back messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to an answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code m From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code Note however when calling in from outside you can retrieve messages only from the first machine that answers To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extensions X and Y that you want the machines to cover For extensions X and Y set Line Ringing for all lines to Immediate Ring Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as a extension Calling Group Extensions Night Service Group Extensions 504 D Extensions 505 Adjust both answering machines to answer on a different number of rings so they do not both try to pick up the same call For example set answering machine 1 to 4 rings and answering machine 2 to 6 rings If you cannot adjust
175. es 3 13 Dialing restrictions and permissions disallowed phone numbers 5 36 15 37 emergency phone numbers 5 46 forfaxmachine 4 14 0 0 Direct programming method 2 15 Direct Station Select see Auto Dial buttons and Intercom Autodialers Disallowed List Assignments 405 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 4 amp 404 5 37 1 5 38 Display adjusting contrast MLS 18D onl 3 assigning a nametoj 5 49 5 50 features 5 39 5 40 0 name 5 49 Display Language 303 Display phone for programming 2 12 S Distinctive Ring 308 5 42 for receptionist DoNotDisturb 5 43 IN 2 Index a ee Doorphones description Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 5 44 Doorphone Extensions 604 605 5 45 programming for Drop Conference 5 30 Cd Dropping parties from a conference call 5 28 5 30 DSS see and DTMF signaling Electrical specifications Electromagnetic Interference filter 4 3 B 6 Emergency Phone Number List 406 5 EMI see Electromagnetic Interference filter Environmental requirements Exclusive Hold 5 48 Cid Extension adding an copying sns ooo customizing an groups numbering programming 2 412 5 5 31 1 programming from 2 1 2 23 Cd receptionist swapping 2 6 transfer return Extension 10 11 2 1 2 20 1 1 1 Extension Name
176. et display Volume Control Buttons all models except the MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Press W to decrease or A to increase the volume as follows To adjust ringer volume press W or A while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle To adjust speaker volume press W or A while listening to a call through the speaker To adjust handset volume press W or A while listening through the handset To adjust background music volume press W or A while listening to music through the phone s speaker To adjust the display contrast on the MLS 18D phone press x then W to decrease the brightness or A to increase the brightness while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle Earpiece Volume Control Switch MLC 6 and MDC 9000 Handset To adjust handset volume slide switch up high or down low Volume Control MDW 9000 Handset Press to increase or to decrease volume of earpiece or ringer Ringer Volume Control MLC 6 and MDC 9000 Base To adjust volume press W or A while the phone is idle Status Button MLC 6 and MDC 9000 Handset Quickly updates the display on the handset On Off Button MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Handset Turns the handset on and off You must turn the handset on to make calls Mute Button MDW 9000 Handset Press to have a private conversation with someone near you while on a call Talk Indicator MLC 6 and MDC 9000 Base Lights when handset is lifted and turned on Charge Indicat
177. et the auto answer feature of the modem to Off Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 19 Send and Receive Modem If you need to place and receive calls with the modem use the setup shown in Figure 4 10 This setup makes line A the primary modem line but keeps the line available for users at other extensions when all other lines are busy Modem Line A Lines CONTROL UNIT Figure 4 10 Send and Receive Modem To Use Calls on the modem line line A ring only at extension X Also line A is the ast line selected by other extensions so the modem line is unavailable for the modem only when all other lines in the system are being used To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A For extension X set Automatic Line Selection to select outside lines first line A selected last For all other extensions set Automatic Line Selection so that line A is the last line in the select sequence That way the modem line is used for outgoing voice calls only when all other lines are busy Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Immediate Ring Set all other lines assigned to extension X to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension
178. extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button to turn Do Not Disturb on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Do Not Disturb is on Do Not Disturb F01 5 43 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Description This System Programming procedure identifies up to 24 extensions that are to signal when a doorphone button is pressed When a person uses the doorphone it signals all alert extensions at the same time If the alert extension is a system phone the call signals with a unique ding dong sound to distinguish it from other calls Additionally if you have two doorphones they signal with different tones so you can distinguish between them Related Features m You must use Doorphone Extensions 604 and 605 to identify the extensions to which doorphones are connected m lf Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled Considerations You cannot bridge two doorphones together Valid Entries 1 Not an Alert Extension v 2 Doorphone 1 Alert Extension 3 Doorphone 2 Alert Extension 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 Alert Extension Programming To identify doorphone alert extensions 1 Press Feature 2 2 System Program System Program 5 2 6 The display reads DoorPhneAlert Extension 2 Enter the first alert extension n
179. f the answering machine is to cover transferred calls make sure the number of rings is less than the amount of transfer return rings set for the extension This assures that the answering machine will pick up transferred calls before they return to the transfer return extension If you intercept a call from the answering machine you will hear a click to notify you that the answering machine has turned off Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 7 Call Reporting Devices SMDR SMDR Station Message Detail Recording is a call reporting feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting information provides you with the ability to m Detect any unauthorized calls m Bill clients or projects m Bill back by departments m Reduce telephone costs by identifying the need to change telecommunications services like adding a WATS line for calls to a particular area code Call reporting information is recorded after each call is completed The system records information for each call that lasts at least 10 seconds For outgoing calls the timing begins when you lift the handset or press Spkr to access an outside line For incoming calls the timing begins when you answer the call Timing stops when the call is disconnected The system sends the information through a 1200 baud serial interface to either a serial printer or a call accounting device The device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the processor module Programming Use t
180. fer from AA displays when a call transferred by a PARTNER Attendant was not answered and is being returned to your extension Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming To identify an extension where a PARTNER Attendant is installed 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 7 2 Enter the extension number to which the PARTNER Attendant is connected For example to select extension 27 press 2 7 3 To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 Toassign or unassign a second PARTNER Attendant extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 2 AA Extensions 607 Abbreviated Ringing 305 Description This feature applies only to system phones This System Programming procedure turns Abbreviated Ringing on or off at the system phone at a specific extension When a user is on a call and Abbreviated Ringing is on any incoming call rings only once The green light next to the line button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs up or for a transferred call until it returns to the transfer return extension This feature prevents incoming calls from distracting users when they are busy on another call To allow calls to ring repeatedly set Abbreviated Ringing to Not A
181. for Group Call Distribution m Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group Doing so lets outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order 5 58 Group Call Distribution 206 m If you install a voice messaging system assign the system extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 Then use this procedure to assign outside lines to Hunt Group 7 for Automated Attendant Service Callers hear a greeting and are prompted to enter digits to transfer to a specific extension or group without operator assistance Valid Entries 1 Assigned for hunting to groups 1 6 or to group 7 for the voice messaging System s Automated Attendant Service 2 Not Assigned v 3 VMS Line Cover available only for Hunt Group 7 Programming To set up lines for Group Call Distribution 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 0 6 2 Atthe Group prompt enter a group number 1 6 7 for the voice messaging system For example to select group 1 press 1 3 Atthe Line
182. format where mm is the month ad is the day and yy is the year The system uses the date set with System Date 101 Time The time of the connection is shown in hh mm format where hh is the hour and mm is the minute The system uses the time set with System Time 103 and is shown in 24 hour military time Number For an outgoing call this is the dialed number first 15 digits only or the speed dial code of a Marked System Speed Dial number preceded by an F For an incoming call IN appears in this field A character prints as the last digit of a dialed number if the called party hangs up before the system user or a prints if the number of digits dialed exceeds the 15 digits that this field can hold Duration The duration of the call is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds This is the total time of the call including any time the call is on hold Line Number This is the outside line used to make or receive the call Station Extension In general this is the extension that answered or placed the call For redirected incoming calls the last extension on the call is shown on the report as follows For transferred incoming calls the destination extension Fortransferred outgoing calls the originator extension For pickup calls the extension picking up the call For forwarded calls the extension answering the forwarded call Acco
183. g Group 1 have standard MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phones those extensions are not included in the simultaneous page Programming To program a Simultaneous Paging button 1 2 3 4 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left Intercom x 7 0 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 120 Simultaneous Paging I 70 Using System Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Press the programmed button or intercom x 7 o then lift the handset 2 Speak into the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phone speakers in Calling Group 1 If your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Standard Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dia x z o 3 Speakinto the handset Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phone speakers i
184. g system automatically turns on the message light at a subscriber s extension when a message is left in the mailbox If you use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use Message Light Off to turn the light off You can program a Message Light On button on a system phone to turn the message light on at a specific extension with one touch Programming To program a Message Light On button 1 2 3 4 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Te Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 0 2 Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Message Light On FO9XX 5 97 Using System Phone To turn on the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press Feature 0 2 If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes on Skip Step 2 2 f no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn on or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Standard Phone To turn on the message light 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone
185. gram additional Auto Dial buttons or exit programming mode From a system phone to dial an outside number or extension number you can lift the handset or press Spkr but you do not have to do so 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press intercom 8 and dial the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the lights next to Spkr and Mic go on and you are active on the speakerphone Press the Auto Dial button on which the outside number or extension number is programmed The system automatically selects a line if you did not specify one turns on the speaker if you did not lift the handset and dials the Auto Dial number The number being dialed will show on a display phone To use an Auto Dial button programmed with a feature code or account code follow the directions for the feature you want to use 5 14 Auto Dialing Automatic Extension Privacy 7304 Description This System Programming procedure lets you either allow users to join active calls at an extension or prevent users from joining active calls at the extension When Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned for an extension other users cannot join active calls at that extension This feature is typically used for standard phones and extensions connected to fax machines modems and credit card scanners which make and receive data calls that should not be interrupted Related Features m To ma
186. gs with an intercom ring ring BEEP until the originator hangs up then it changes to a transfer ring ring BEEP BEEP On a standard phone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring ring until the originator hangs up then it changes to a transfer ring ring ring ring How to Transfer a Call System Phone To pass a Call to another extension 1 While active on the call press Transfer The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone The green light next to the line button winks 2 Dial the extension number or 7 7 and a Hunt Group number or 7 and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred 3 When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing after Step 2 above If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller Transferring Calls 5 137 m To make a voice signaled transfer to a system phone in Step 2 of the procedure on the previous page press x plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses f you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your
187. hat restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System phones give you more protection against such misuse than standard phones Therefore we strongly recommend that you install system phones where restricting phone use is important m f the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system the control unit may not be able to prevent calls for extensions restricted to Local Only If dialing restrictions are needed on Centrex lines use Centrex restrictions instead Valid Entries 1 No Restriction can make toll local and intercom calls v 2 Inside intercom Only 3 Local intercom and local Only Outgoing Call Restriction 401 5 105 Programming To identify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 1 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 30 press 3 0 3 To change the type of call restriction press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 106 Outgoing Call Restriction 401
188. have intercom dial tone Some dial code features are not available on standard phones as noted by an asterisk in the following list ccount Code Entry ackground Music all Forwarding Call Follow Me all Pickup onference Drop irect Line Pickup Active Line irect Line Pickup ldle Line xclusive Hold Calling Ring Page o c Hunting Ring Voice Signal Pickup Last Number Redial e x o c O Q x o c O oudspeaker Paging age Light Of U Z Z Z a D o 1H o 0 e o m 3 O 53 3 ersonal Speed Dial Numbers D D O D dp ave Number Redia imultaneous Paging stem Speed Dial Numbers ouch Tone Enable oice Mailbox Transfer Available only on system phones Learning About Telephones 3 13 Using Auxiliary Equipment Contents Overview 4 1 m Ifa Device Has Trouble 4 3 Answering Machines 4 4 m Single Answering Machine 4 5 m Multiple Answering Machines 4 6 m Personal Answering Machine 4 7 Call Reporting Devices SMDR 4 8 Credit Card Scanners 4 11 Fax Machines 4 12 m Using Fax Machines 4 12 Restricting Dialing from a Fax Machine 4 14 m Send and Receive Fax Machines 4 17 Modems 4 19 m Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Onl 4 19 m Send and Receive Modem 4 20 ll SS Contents Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 4 21 PARTNER Attendant 4 23 m Backup for Receptionist 4 23 Voice Messaging Systems 4 24 m Delayed Call Handling 4 24
189. he Transfer button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone Transferring a call lets users pass a call from one extension to another Users can transfer both outside calls and intercom calls to other system extensions Related Features To transfer calls to an extension with a single touch you can program the extension number onto an Auto Dial button see Auto Dialing To transfer calls to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press Transfer before pressing the Manual Signaling button The system is factory set to return a transferred call after it rings four times at the destination extension to the extension that transferred it You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to change the number of rings for all system extensions You can use to program a different extension to which unanswered calls from a particular extension should return If you have a voice messaging system you can use Voice Mailbox Transfer to transfer a caller directly to a subscriber s voice mailbox An extension programmed with Call Waiting 316 cannot transfer a party while both calls are active Considerations When you press Transfer the call is put on hold and its associated green light winks The caller hears music on hold if it is available A transferred call appears on the destination extension s intercom button unless the destination extension has a line button for the line on w
190. he PARTNER Plus Communications System installation guide provides installation instructions REN is a measure of the power it takes to ring a phone The typical home phone line handles 4 0 5 0 RENs each extension jack in your system handles up to 2 0 RENs Overview 1 7 Programming Contents Overview 2 1 Hardware Considerations 2 2 Initial System Setup 2 3 m Setting the System Clock 2 8 m Assigning Lines 2 3 Customizing Extensions 2 4 m Copy Settings 2 5 Changing Settings after Installation 2 5 m Changing the System Clock 2 5 m Adding New Lines 2 5 2 5 m Adding New Extensions m Swapping Extensions 2 6 Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services 2 6 System Programming Options 2 7 Restricting Access to Outside Lines 2 8 Overriding Dialing Restrictions 2 8 Summar 2 9 m Setting Up Groups of Extensions 2 10 m Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment 2 10 m Hospitality Features 2 12 BA Contents 2 12 2 12 Using System Programming m The Programming Overlays m Programming Mode 2 14 m Changing Programming Type m Remote Programming Telephone Programming Options 2 15 2 15 2 16 m Automatic Line Selection 2 16 m Extension Name on Displa aes m Line Ringing 2 16 m Personal Speed Dialing 2 16 2 17 m Programming Telephone Buttons Programming a Receptionist s Extension 2 17 Call Handling Options 2 17 Button Programming 2 18 Using Telephone Programming 2 20 m Telephone M
191. he extension The call waiting tone is not repeated Use the switchhook on a standard phone to place calls on hold transfer a call answer a call waiting call or set up a conference call For details see Using the Switchhook on the next page or Answering Calls and Conference Calls in Chapter 5 If the standard phone has a message waiting light use it to notify users of messages For details see Message Light On and B in Chapter 5 For a list of supported phones see in Chapter 1 Alternatively if you have a voice messaging system the light is used to indicate that a message has been left in your mailbox On a standard phone the message light flashes when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message 3 8 Learning About Telephones Ringing Patterns Standard phones have these ringing patterns m An outside call will ring ring ring m Anintercom call will ring ring ring ring ring ring m Atransferred call or an unanswered transferred call that is ringing back will ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to phones Telephones use the ringing patterns described here instead Dial Tones Standard phones have two different dial tones m Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connec
192. he following programming procedures for call reporting m SMDR Record Type 4608 to specify the type of calls that you want to record for call reporting either all calls or outgoing calls only m SMDR Top of Page 609 to notify the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page m Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to making outside calls and Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes m Display Language 303 to specify the language to be used for display messages The call report header is printed in the same language as is specified for extension 10 4 8 Using Auxiliary Equipment Call Reports A call report is a page of information that begins with a header The header includes field names that describe the information in each call record The call record is a line of information that includes the fields shown in Figure 4 4 DATE TIME NUMBER DUR LINE STN ACCOUNT C II IT 95 Xl ll 12015558014 00 01 40 08 18 C 11 17 95 11 34 19085556036 00 04 28 02 32 1725 I 11 17 95 13 35 IN 00 02 12 01 10 Figure 4 4 Sample Call Report Each page includes 59 records The report has the following fields Call Type C indicates outgoing calls I indicates incoming calls SMDR Record Type 2608 defines if incoming calls are reported Date The date of the call is shown in mm dd yy
193. he higher number when adding up RENs Specifications A 1 Electrical 10 Watts 35 BTUs hour per 400 module normal and maximum power consumption Specifications 65 Watts 225 BTUs hour per 206 module during normal operation 100 Watts 350 BTUs hour per 206 module during maximum power consumption U S Canada and other 110V countries 4 Amps maximum current at full system capacity processor module and four 206 modules Countries using 220V 2 2 Amps maximum current processor module and four 206 modules 4 day memory backup 96 hours Processor Module 68000 microprocessor 128Kbytes RAM 512Kbytes ROM Specifications Extension J ack Ringing voltage 5VDC 140 VDC peak to peak trapezoidal wave shaping Specifications 35 to 38 Volt talk battery Ringing frequency 20 Hz PAGE J ack Draws current on inner wire pair Specifications Provides contact closure on outer wire pair 600 Ohm impedance SMDR Output 1200 baud Format No parity 8 data bits 2 stop bits XON XOFF protocol Carriage return Line feeds Environmental Mount on a wall at least 2 feet 0 6 meters from the floor wall mounting required Requirements Locate within 5 feet 1 5 meters of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded Control Unit electrical outlet not controlled by a switch using supplied 7 foot 2 1 meter cords Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C not in direct sunlight Humidity 1596 9096 noncondensing For proper
194. her material from radio broadcasts you may be required to obtain the permission of the copyright owner One way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP BMI and or similar performing rights organizations to obtain a license AT amp T disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license if required For alternative usually pre licensed sources of music to use with this feature you may wish to contact Telephonetics International Inc at 1 800 446 5366 Background Music stops when a user makes or answers a call but resumes when the phone becomes idle again If a system phone and a standard phone with a message waiting light are connected in a combination extension the standard phone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system phone You can program a Background Music button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch A button with lights is recommended Programming To program a Background Music button 1 ao RO nm Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights Press Feature 1 9 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 20 Background Music F19 Using To turn Background Music on 1 From an MLS model system phone press the programmed bu
195. hich the call was received When a call you transferred is answered the red light goes on next to the line button on which the call was received If you transfer a call to an extension for which you have an Auto Dial button and the call is unanswered the green light next to the Auto Dial button flutters when the call returns to your extension Calls can be transferred to Calling Groups and Hunt Groups When you transfer a call from a display phone the number to which you are transferring the call briefly appears on the display If a transferred call is unanswered the number of the extension that is returning the transferred call also appears on display phones 5 136 Transferring Calls If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call transfer feature that lets you transfer a call to another Centrex extension so that the line on which the call came in is free to place and receive other calls However to use Centrex transfer you must be able to dial the extension directly using the Centrex extension number if a Centrex line is shared by several extensions you cannot use Centrex transfer to direct the call to a specific extension For more information on such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the system Recall feature instead On a system phone a transferred call rin
196. ht is on VMS Cover is on and your unanswered intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If you turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing the call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox If VMS Cover is already on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice mailbox VMS Cover F15 5 143 VMS Cover Rings 117 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions programmed for VMS Cover defines the number of times a call rings before it is sent to a user s voice mailbox Related Features m VMS Cover also applies to lines that have been designated an owner with Line Coverage Extension 208 m f an extension has VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover 310 active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings Valid Entries 1 9 38 wv Programming To change the number of times calls ring before being sent to the voice messaging system 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 1 Z 2 Enter a different setting 1 9 For example to set VMS Cover Rings to 4 press Next Data or Prev Data until the display reads VMS Cov
197. i 2 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension Y If the fax machine has the Notify feature set it to select intercom first If the fax machine does not have the Notify feature and you want it to be able to dial out when fax 1 is unavailable set Automatic Line Selection for extension Y to select outside lines first line A selected last Set Line Ringing tor line A at extension X to Immediate Ring set all other lines at extension Y to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring or Delayed Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension Y to Assigned Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or IHunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine at extension Y use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension Y as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button 4 18 Using Auxiliary Equipment Modems There are several ways to use modems with your system as described below NOTE Modems can connect directly to an extension jack without an adapter However if you connect a high speed modem through the control unit you may experience some degradation of efficiency and throughput depending on the quality of the central office lines connec
198. ial a number by pressing a single button m Forinstructions on entering special characters such as Pause in a number see Special Dialing Functions m Youcan use System Speed Dial Numbers to create a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers available to all system users m You can store account codes as Personal Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature m External Hotline Z311 uses Personal Speed Dial code 80 for the external hotline telephone number Considerations m If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system m Personal Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed onto Auto Dial buttons m You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 Valid Entries Any phone number up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 x and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Hold Pause Mic Stop Sekr Recall and Transfer Touch Tone Enable assigned to codes 80 through 99 No number assigned to any code v 5 110 Personal Speed Dial Numbers Programming To program Personal Speed Dial numbers 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program
199. ial additional charges for your telecommunications services You are responsible for the security of your system There may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system You are responsible for programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use Your system manager should read all documents provided with this product to fully understand the features that can introduce the risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk AT amp T does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it AT amp T will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use Trademarks Call Assistant PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS and PassageWay are trademarks of AT amp T Magic on Hold MERLIN MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 PagePac PARTNER and SYSTIMAX are registered trademarks of AT amp T Microsoft is a registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Warranty AT amp T provides a limited warranty to this product Refer tol AT amp T Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability in Appendix B of this book Ordering Information The order number for this book is 518 455 224 To order additional books call 1 800 432 6600 in the continental U S and 1 800 255 1242 in Canada For information about ordering other system
200. ic or lift the handset m Torespond to a voice interrupt on busy call you hear two beeps and the originator s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking will probably also hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Askthe party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hangup previously Answering Calls 5 11 Standard Phone If your standard phone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use this button whenever you are instructed to press the switchhook m To answer a call When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call m Toanswer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps
201. icting use at individual extension 5 79 15 80 Line Access Restriction 302 Line Assignment 301 5 81 5 83 Cd Line Coverage Extension 208 Index IN 3 Lines Number of 104 Lists allowed phone numbers 5 8 5 9 ss disallowed phone numbers 5 37 15 38 emergency phone numbers forced account codes Loudspeaker Paging 5 Loudspeaker paging system 2 M Maintenance Making acall 5 89 5 92 i ManualSignaling 5 9315 94 Cd Marked System Speed Dial numbers 2 8 5 130 Message indicator Message Light On Off 5 95 5 98 Microphone 3 5b 3 6 1 y Microphone Mic button 3 3 2 5 Z Microphone disable see Mute MLS CA24 Intercom Autodialers 1 6 2 19 5 13 MLS model telephones 1 5 3 1 JB 6 MLS 34D telephone for receptionist MOH see Music on hold Monitoring call activity 2 18 5 13 5 79 Music on hold IN 4 Index NameDisplay 5 49 y O Night Service 427 auxiliary equipment with dialing restrictions with 2 8 programming 5 102 1 5 103 using 5 102 with password 5 128 5 101 1 5 102 Night Service Button 503 Numbering of lines and extensions O One touch transfer see Auto Dial buttons Optionalequipment 2 10 4 1 S O Ordering equipment reference materials and books B 4 sd Out of building extension requirements 4 3 sd Outgoing
202. ide line is automatically selected If you combine the credit card scanner with a system phone or standard phone you cannot use the phone while the credit card scanner is operating You can use only one of the devices at a time To Program 1 UsejLine Assignment 301 to assign the lines you want the scanner to use to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select the outside lines that the scanner is to use Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension If the scanner has an auto answer feature turn it off O a A O For multiple scanners repeat Steps 1 5 for each extension Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 11 Fax Machines This section suggests several ways you can set up fax machines to work with your system It includes instructions for programming and using a Fax Management button on a system phone in order to monitor the status of a fax machine and transfer calls to it with a single touch transferring calls to the fax machine extension and using an AT amp T fax machine s Notify feature Using Fax Machines Fax Management F eature On any system phone you can program a button with lights to serve as a Fax Management button The lights next to this button tell you when the fax machine is in use available or not answering for example when it is out of paper You can also use the button to t
203. ilable and that extension does not answer an incoming call the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension after the programmed amount of transfer return rings Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G 5 63 m You can program a Group Hunting button on a system phone to ring or voice signal a Hunt Group with one touch m f you have a voice messaging system you can program Hunt Group 7 intercom z Zz z on a button to retrieve messages with one touch Examples Here are some useful applications for a Hunt Group m Place the extensions of employees who work in a department sharing calls such as a customer service group in a Hunt Group so that when a call comes in to the receptionist it may be transferred to the next available extension This alleviates the problem of one employee receiving most of the calls Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group Doing so lets outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order Programming To program a Hunt Group b
204. ility in directing and answering calls Integrated voice messaging support with the PARTNER MAIL VS system or PARTNER MAIL system so callers can reach a desired extension or group without operator assistance and leave messages at unanswered or busy extensions Power failure operation with standard phones allowing you to make and receive calls during a power failure while retaining programmed equipment settings for up to four days An optional Uninterruptible Power Supply or UPS is also available to allow full equipment operation during a power failure Centrex or PBX operation support including one touch dialing of feature access codes on system phones Flexible dialing restrictions and permissions so you can control telephone activity and phone bills Overview 1 1 Special hospitality features that let Bed and Breakfast proprietors for example regulate phone use in guest rooms and schedule wake up calls for guests Easy to use programming procedures making it simple for you to manage your system and telephones System display phones provide feedback during programming Two system programming extensions allowing you to program the system from one extension without interrupting call activity at the other programming extension usually the receptionist s extension Modular connections to the control unit making it easy to reconfigure your system or to add lines and or extensions as your business grows Direct connecti
205. in Programming on the next page Related Features Use Hotline 603 to identify an internal hotline extension Use Line Assignment 301 to assign outside lines to the external hotline extension and Automatic Line Selection to set the extension to select outside lines first If your business use of the external hotline requires immediate dialing of the programmed number dedicate a line for exclusive use by this extension do not assign the line to any other extension or use the line for any other purpose You can set Line Ringing to No Ring for all lines assigned to the external hotline extension to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the extension Make sure there are no call or line restrictions assigned to an external hotline extension because that will prevent the outside number from being dialed See Outgoing Call Restriction 401 and Line Access Restriction 302 Remove external hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry 307 to the external hotline extension Considerations Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage the external hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the standard devices connected to your system dial out at the same time See Using for more information A standard phone without a ke
206. incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports See Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 for more information on call reporting m lf an account code is entered for an outgoing call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the originating extension as the owner of the call Conversely if an account code is entered for an incoming call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the destination extension as the owner of the call m Account codes can be changed during a call However only the person who entered the original account code can enter a different account code SMDR prints changed account codes as follows For optional or forced account code entry without a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last account code entered 5 4 Account Code Entry F12 Programming Using For forced account code entry with a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last valid account code entered If the changed account code is not valid the report prints the original account code If a Forced Account Code List exists you can check to see if an account code is valid when entering or changing an account code by pressing Feature 1 2 after entering the account code If the account code is not valid you will hear a denial tone The AT amp T Call Accounting Terminal uses less than 16 digits for an account code Refer to the device
207. ine Extension Modules for connecting to the telephone company provided USOC RJ11C jacks Use only FCC compliant line cords and jacks for these connections FCC Information C 1 This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines m Notification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number REN which can be found on the right hand side of the control unit The facility interface code which is O2LS2 You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s m REN Information The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the same telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to incoming calls In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company m Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment from the network and not use it until the problem has been corr
208. ines and modems to the extension jacks either directly or through your building s modular wall jacks Each 206E module has a green power indicator that shows it is receiving power The system requires at least one 206E module m 400E Module is similar to the 206E module but without extension jacks It has four outside line jacks This module is an inexpensive way to add lines when you do not need more extensions If you are upgrading from a PARTNER system or a previous release of a PARTNER Plus system you can still use its 200E modules each providing two line jacks If you want message waiting capability on standard phones that are equipped with message waiting lights you must connect those phones to extension jacks on Release 3 1 R3 1 or later 206 modules Additionally you need an R3 1 or later processor module Hereafter references to 206 modules include 206E and all 206 modules used with previous releases of the product Similarly references to 400 modules include 400E and all 400 modules used with previous releases of the product System Capacity The combination of 206 and 400 modules installed determines the number of available lines and extensions The system allows up to 12 lines and up to 24 extensions however these maximums cannot be achieved simultaneously m For maximum ine capacity 12 lines install two 206 modules and two 400 modules This arrangement allows up to 12 extensions m Formaximum extension capaci
209. ing After an extension receives a Hunt Group call the next call to the Hunt Group will not ring or voice signal that extension first unless all the other extensions in the group are busy or do not answer The system supports up to seven Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system For more information refer to Voice Messaging Systems in Chapter 4 Related Features m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 4505 to assign extensions to a Hunt Group m Set Transfer Return Rings 105 to four or greater to ensure that calls continue hunting to other group extensions if the call is not answered m Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and leave your desk so that a call to your extension moves directly to the next available extension in the group m You can use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign outside lines to a Hunt Group Doing so allows outside calls on those lines to route directly into that Hunt Group instead of being transferred by the receptionist m Hunt Group calls are not eligible fori VMS Cover Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group W Outside calls can be answered and transferred to a Hunt Group The voice messaging system and the PARTNER Attendant also can transfer calls to a Hunt Group m Calls cannot be transferred to a Hunt Group if all extensions in that group are busy m f only one extension in a Hunt Group is ava
210. ing Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 Valid Entries 1 All Calls outgoing and incoming 2 Outgoing Only Programming To identify the type of calls to include for call reporting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 6 0 8 2 Press Nex Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 122 SMDR Record Type 608 SMDR Top Of Page 609 Description This System Programming procedure notifies the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page Use this feature after inserting paper or clearing a jam When this feature is used the system prints a new call report header Related Features m You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports m You can use Display Language 303 to specify the language in which the call report page header should print Considerations m This feature requires special hardware For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly Using 1 Make sure the paper in the printer is aligned at the top of a new page 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program amp 0 2 The system responds by printing the call report page header
211. ing immediately at the fax extension X Since that line is not assigned to any other extension in the Night Service Group only extension X receives fax transmissions Likewise with Night Service on calls on line B ring immediately at the modem extension Y Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 21 NOTE If answering machines are connected to Night Service extensions you can join a call that was already answered by an answering machine from any system phone If you have an AT amp T answering machine with the Call Intercept feature the answering machine drops off the call when you join it To Program af Use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X and for line B at extension Y to No Ring Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting 316 extensions Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions or Hunt Group Extensions 505 Assign a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Assign extensions X and Y to the Night Service Group 504 4 22 Using Auxiliary Equipment PARTNER Attendant The PARTNER Attendant answers calls and directs them to a specified extension Calling Group or Hunt Group based on the digits a caller dials after listening to a list of choices in a recorded greeting For example the PARTNER Attendant could an
212. ing or page any of four Calling Groups For more information see Group Calling Ring Page Users can ring any of the seven Hunt Groups or voice signal Hunt Groups 1 6 For more information see Group Hunting Ring Voice Sig If dialing restrictions have been programmed for an extension the system may prevent a user at that extension from placing certain calls For example an extension may not be allowed to dial 900 numbers Or an extension may be programmed to take incoming calls only so that the user cannot dial out at all The following features provide dialing restrictions and Outgoing Call Restriction 401 The following features can be used to override dialing restrictions Phone Number Lists 2407 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and System Password 403 Users with system phones can enter account codes to help your company track both incoming and outgoing telephone calls For more information see You can also use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that must enter account codes prior to dialing outside phone numbers including those on the Emergency List m Users can signal then speak to system phone users who are already active on a call to alert them of important business matters provided Interrupt On Busy 312 is Assigned for the recipient Making Calls 5 89 Considerations m The following instructions assume that
213. ing system feature that provides Call Answer Service when a call is not answered by a covered extension See also Call Answer Service Voice Mail Service A voice messaging system feature that lets users retrieve messages and record greetings Voice mailbox A storage area for greetings and messages in a voice messaging system Voice messaging system VMS An optional call routing and messaging device that provides call coverage by answering calls and routing them to caller designated extensions It also lets callers leave messages at unanswered extensions and lets subscribers retrieve their messages The system supports either the PARTNER MAIL VS system or the PARTNER MAIL system GL 6 Glossary Me W Wake Up Service A special application feature that lets the receptionist at extension 10 schedule wake up or reminder calls for specific extensions A Index Button label sheetsj2 21 B 6 Buttons Auto Dial lt intercom A line 3 20 system phone 3 2 Abbreviated Ringing 305 Accessories B 6 O 1 1 1 OO Account Code Entry 5 4 j 5 6 5 54 5 5G6 Adding lines and extensions Allowed List Assignments 22408 5 7 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Amplified handset B 6 o Z o O Answering a call C Callaccounting 5 122 5 123 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialers 1 6 2 19 5
214. ins how system and standard phones work with the system To help train co workers on telephone basics you can share this information with them About This Guide wv m Using Auxiliary Equipment The system supports a wide variety of auxiliary equipment including fax machines modems voice messaging systems and call reporting devices Chapter 4 provides advice on setting up these devices to work effectively with the system m Daily Operation Depending on how your system is set up you may need to oversee some of the system s daily operations For example you may need to turn on Night Service at the end of each day before leaving the office Reference information on all features including descriptions and instructions for using each feature is provided in m Solving Problems Chapter 6 provides information on solving problems if your system or telephones malfunction Once you are experienced with the system use the Table of Contents or Index to locate the information you need Throughout this guide feature names are printed in bold so you can easily look up the name in Chapter 5 Feature Reference for additional information on the feature For example if you see a reference to System Date 101 you can look it up in Chapter 5 for details Product Safety Statements Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a A A CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal in
215. is automatically dialed m Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 identifies extensions to which doorphones are connected Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 identifies extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed 2 10 Programming m AA Extensions 607 identifies extensions to which PARTNER Attendants are connected This lets the system notify users with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the PARTNER Attendant Also Transfer Return Extension F306 lets you identify the extension to which a call transferred by the PARTNER Attendant should be routed if the destination extension does not answer m SMDR Record Type 608 specifies the type of calls that you want to record for call reporting either all calls or outgoing calls only Code Entry lets users specify account codes for outside telephone calls if used the account codes are included on the call report SMDR Top of Page 609 notifies the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page m The voice messaging system uses the following procedures Hunt Group Extensions 2505 assigns the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 the VMS Hunt Group The PARTNER MAIL VS system uses two extensions the PARTNER MAIL system uses two or four extensions Group Call Distribution 206 assigns lines to the VMS Hunt Group So calls can ring directly i
216. isplay phones can show you the type of call that is ringing at your extension For standard and non display system phones you can identify the type of call by the system s ringing patterns See Ringing Patterns in Chapter 3 Note that there are no unique ringing patterns for forwarded calls 5 10 Answering Calls How to Answer Calls Ringing at Your Extension System Phone You can answer a call on any line that is ringing or select a specific line if more than one is ringing m When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call If more than one line is ringing you are connected to the line that has been ringing for the longest time If the call is an intercom call and you have a display phone the caller s extension number briefly appears on your display m To answer a call on a specific line 1 Press the line button for the line you want to answer 2 Lift the handset or press Sp You are connected to the call m Toanswer a call when you are already on a call 1 Press Hold J The call you are on is placed on hold 2 Press the button for the new call You are connected to the new call 3 To return to the first call put the second call on hold and press the line button for the first call m To answer a voice signaled call your phone beeps and you hear the caller s voice fthe microphone is on you can speak after the beep Ifthe microphone is not on press m
217. jury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided A WARNING Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal personal injury if the hazard is not avoided How to Comment on This Guide A feedback form is located at the end of this guide after the appendixes If the form is missing send your comments and recommendations for changes to Publications Manager AT amp T 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W 226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 FAX 1 908 953 6912 vi About This Guide Overview Contents Features and Capabilities Li Important Safety Instructions A WARNING The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be followed when using your telephone equipment 1 2 3 10 Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning DO NOT use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning This product should be serviced by or taken to a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required DO NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement location DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart stand or table Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Avoi
218. l locations but wants to keep the same extension number you can make the change easily by swapping modular connections at the control unit For example if the users at extensions 29 and 32 switch offices you can disconnect the modular plug from extension jack 29 in the control unit and reconnect it at extension jack 32 Likewise unplug the wire that was connected to extension jack 32 and reconnect it at extension jack 29 Then the users can take their respective phones to their new location to keep the same extension number and retain the phone s programmed settings Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services This section applies only if you use PBX or Centrex services with your system If it does not apply go to the next section System Programming Options m PBX services are provided by a private telephone switch m Centrex services are provided by your local telephone company from a Central Office CO outside your premises These services include the Centrex lines connected to your control unit modules and some set of features such as hold conference or transfer that are available on those lines Centrex services may be offered in your area under a different name For specific Centrex features to be available to you your company must subscribe to those features For specific information on using Centrex see the Centrex documentation provided by your local telephone company Some of the issues you shoul
219. lay reads LineAssign 15 L01 1 Assigned m f you want to remove a line assignment press Next Data until the display reads LineAssign 15 L01 2 Not Assigned m If you want to assign the line to a specific button press 3 The display reads LineAssign 15 L01 3 Select Button Then press a line button to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select At this point m To program another line for this extension press Next Item Or Prev Item until the correct line number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Assignment 301 5 83 Line Coverage Extension 208 Description This System Programming procedure identifies an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate VMS Cover for the specified line Related Features m An extension s owned line is eligible for coverage only if is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction 302 is set to No Restriction or In Only m Use VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover 310 to redirect an extension s calls on owned lines to the voice messaging system m Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to specify the number of times a call should ring
220. le button 4 Press Feature 0 5 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To use Last Number Redial 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Pressthe programmed button or press Feature 0 5 Digits are displayed as they are dialed on system display phones Standard Phone To use Last Number Redial 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 0 s 5 78 Last Number Redial F05 Line Access Restriction 302 Description This System Programming procedure restricts an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on a specific line For example you may want a secretary to answer calls on a manager line but not to make any outgoing calls on the line in this case you can assign the manager s line to the secretary s extension and restrict it to In Only Related Features m This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension with a line set to In Only or No Access cannot select the line to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 2406 See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions in Chapter 2 for a summary of all dialing restrictions m To prevent an extension from using a line restrict the line even if it is not assigned to the extension so it cannot be accessed using Direct Line Pickup If an extension s access to a line is set to No Access or In Only the
221. least one outside line in the system is set to rotary Considerations Do not change this setting unless the system is experiencing problems Valid Entries 124 seconds 2 8 seconds v 3 12 seconds Programming To change the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 0 8 2 Press Nex Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 5 117 Save Number Redial F04 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature saves the last outside number dialed up to 28 digits from an extension with a system phone into temporary memory Users can use this feature to save a number before they hang up on a busy or unanswered call Once saved the number can be redialed at any time The number stays in memory until a different one is saved Related Features m Unlike Last Number Redial this feature lets the user make other calls before redialing the saved number m System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be saved using this feature Considerations m This feature redials all digits dialed on the outside call for which the feature was used except account codes m You can program a Save Number Redial button on a system phone to access the feature with one touch If you do you can press the button to save the number and press the button at a
222. lection to select line A last on all other extensions or remove line A if all other extensions should not use it to make outgoing calls 3 Set Line Ringing for line A on extension X to Immediate Ring On all other extensions set line A to Delayed Ring or No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 4502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 15 Fax Line Saver If you do not use your fax machine enough to justify paying for its own outside line you can put the machine on its own extension With this setup you must transfer calls to it manually If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine see Fax Management Feature Jearlier in this chapter Figure 4 7 shows the setup Figure 4 7 Fax Line Saver Setup To Use When a person answers a call and hears a fax machine signaling on the other end the person can transfer the call to extension X the fa
223. les cas pr cis pr vus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es par un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le foumisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir racours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou un electrician selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign chaque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surcharge le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord e a un circuit t l phonique bouci utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit bouci peut tre constitu e de n importe quellie combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 No d homolagation 230 3756A No de certification CSA LR 60486 L indice de charge 7 C 4 FCC
224. llow you to broadcast a message over a large area by connecting the paging system directly to the PAGE jack on the processor module The system supports all AT amp T paging systems including the entire PagePac line and most paging systems from other manufacturers In addition to its numerous paging features the PARTNER PagePac provides doorspeaker and door unlock capabilities For information on how to use a loudspeaker paging system with the system see Chapter 5 m PARTNER PassageWay Solutlon allows you to combine your Personal Computer PC running Microsoft Windows 3 1 with your phone You can then use your PC for tasks such as dialing out from an electronic phone list logging phone calls and programming your phone m Music on hold systems allow you to play recorded music or messages to callers while they are on hold by connecting the audio source to the processor module The system supports the AT amp T Magic on Hold system and most models from other manufacturers If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain a license from a third party such as ASCAP or BMI m Remote Administration Units RAUS allow you to perform System and Centralized Telephone Programming from a remote location m Extra alerts help make users aware of incoming calls For example you can use an audible alert chime horn or bell to replace a phone ring in a noisy area such as a factory
225. ls on an outside call over a rotary line For example a user may need to dial touch tone digits while on a call to a bank by phone service Related Procedures You must use Dial Mode 2201 to identify rotary lines to the system To activate this feature from within a number stored on an Auto Dial button or as part of a Speed Dial number press Transfer when storing the number see Special Dialing Functions Considerations m This feature is needed only when dialing on a rotary line m Use Touch Tone Enable only after a call is connected For example use this feature after dialing a bank by phone service that requires you to dial touch tone digits m You can program a Touch Tone Enable button on a system phone to turn on Touch Tone Enable with one touch Programming To program a Touch Tone Enable button 1 2 3 4 5 Using Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 0 8 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button or press Feature 0 8 when you need to enter touch tone digits Touch Tone Enable stays in effect until you hang up Touch Tone Enable F08 5 135 Transferring Calls Description This section explains how to transfer calls using t
226. ly flash You are now joined with the call You can tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next to the line button change to alternately flashing red and green Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dbial s s and the number of the line on which the call is being conducted If a system phone joins a call on a standard phone there is a momentary break in the call on the standard phone Joining Calls 5 77 Last Number Redial F05 Description This feature redials the last outside number dialed maximum 28 digits per phone number This feature is useful for immediately redialing a busy number Related Features m You can use Save Number Redial if you want to temporarily save the last number dialed The difference between Last Number Redial and Save Number Redial is that with Save Number Redial you can make other outside calls before redialing the saved number System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be redialed with this feature Considerations m This feature redials all digits dialed on the last outside call except account codes W You can program a Last Number Redial button on a system phone to redial a number with one touch Programming To program a Last Number Redial button 1 Press Feature 0 a System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmab
227. m is solved m If the problem remains call the AT amp T Helpline Other Problems with System This procedure resets the system Use it when you have any problems that are not covered elsewhere in this chapter The following procedure disconnects all calls in progress but does not erase any system settings Possible Cause System needs a hardware reset What to do Unplug the control unit s power cord from the wall Wait 10 seconds then plug it back in If the problem remains call the AT amp T Helpline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 12 Troubleshooting Specifications Capacities System 206 Module Extension J ack 12 outside lines via line jacks on a 2 outside lines Maximum 2 devices per extension two 206 plus two 400 modules 6 extensions jack total REN on jack not to 24 extensions via extension jacks exceed 2 0 System phone on four 206 modules i 400 Module REN is 0 0 zero 1 loudspeaker paging system 4 outside lines No more than one system phone in jack on processor per jack 1 audio source via MUSIC ON For programming a system display HOLD jack on processor module phone must be connected to RCA phono plug required extension 10 or 11 1 call reporting device via SMDR jack on processor module 355A F adapter required a 2 doorphones using 2 extension jacks a 1
228. m the extension to select outside lines first Considerations m This feature must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 only using Centralized Telephone Programming Individual users cannot program this feature directly m You should program Automatic Line Selection when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features However if you want to program both Automatic Line Selection and Extension Name Display which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming again to program Extension Name Display m For standard touch tone or rotary phones or for any phone used mainly to call other extensions program the extension to select intercom first m For combination extensions the automatic line selection for both devices including a standard device follows the automatic line selection for the extension m You do not need to include all available lines for an extension only the ones you want the system to search through and connect automatically Valid Entries Outside lines 01 12 Left Intercom v 5 16 Automatic Line Selection Examples System Phone With Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an idle outside line in numerical order starting with the lowest line number Then if all outside lines are busy the sy
229. mable button preferably with lights 4 At this point you can m Press Feature 1 1 or m Press Feature 1 1 and the number of the originating extension or E Press Feature 1 1 the number of the originating extension and the number of the destination extension 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To forward calls manually 1 Press Feature 1 1 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding manually 1 Press Feature 1 1 2 Dial your extension number twice To forward calls using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no destination extension was programmed dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 F11 XX XX 5 23 To remove Call Forwarding using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is deactivated on a butto
230. mailbox in order for the caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension This feature is useful when a user knows that a co worker is away from his or her desk Considerations You can program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button on a system phone to transfer a caller directly to a voice mailbox by pressing the button then dialing the mailbox subscriber s extension number Programming To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press Feature 1 4 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using To transfer a caller to a specific subscriber s mailbox 1 From a system phone press the programmed button or press Feature 1 4 2 Enterthe two digit extension number or press an Auto Dial button of the mailbox subscriber for whom the caller wants to leave a message The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the recorded greeting for that mailbox 3 Hang up 5 150 voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Wake Up Service Button 115 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up or reminder calls for system extensions When a wake up call is scheduled for an extension
231. meters for standard phones and 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones m Off Premises Range Extender OPRE allows you to connect a standard touch tone phone beyond 3 000 feet 915 meters in another building on the same continuous property It also allows you to use a special circuit from your local phone company to provide off premises station capability m Electromagnetic Interference EMI filters allow you to block noise generated by a nearby radio station as well as most electrical devices m Caller ID devices such as a PC with Caller ID software support applications for storing or processing Caller ID information You can connect these devices provided you subscribe to the service from your local phone company and connect the device directly to the Caller ID line To install devices refer to Connecting Caller ID Devices in the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide for details Follow the manufacturer s instructions packaged with the devices To order auxiliary equipment refer to l Product Ordering Information in Appendix B If a Device Has Trouble Two System Programming procedures can be used to adjust the system settings for auxiliary equipment installed at an extension if a device has trouble answering calls or dialing out If a device such as an answering machine does not pick up transferred or intercom calls you can iE change the ringing so that all calls ring like outside calls at that ext
232. mited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by AT amp T AT amp T will not be responsible under this limited warranty for damages resulting from m Failure to follow AT amp T s installation operation or maintenance instructions m Unauthorized system modification movement or alteration m Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system m Abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control or m Acts of third parties and acts of God AT amp T S OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE AT amp T ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND DEALERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Limitation of Liability Except as provided below the liability of AT amp T and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims losses damages or expenses from any cause whatsoever including acts or omissions of third parties regardless of the form of action whether in contract tort or otherwise shall not exceed the lesser of 1 the direct damages proven or 2 the repair cost replacement cost license fee annual rental charge or purchase price as the case may be of the equipment that dire
233. n a label on the bottom of the device HEN S Send All Calls Lets you send calls immediately to the voice messaging system Simultaneous paging A feature that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker and all idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 See also Loudspeaker Paging SMDR Station Message Detail Recording See Call reporting Speed dialing A feature that lets a user dial a telephone number quickly by dialing a short code Standard phone An industry standard touch tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home Some standard phones include special feature buttons for frequently used calling functions See also and Industry standard device Station See Extension Station Message Detail Recording SMDR See Call reporting NENNEN Subscriber A user who has a mailbox in the voice messaging System System The AT amp T control unit and system phones that you purchased plus all other telecommunications devices that are connected to your control unit System manager The person in your business who is responsible for managing your system including system programming System phones The AT amp T telephones that are specifically designed for use with PARTNER systems Models include the MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones System Programming Procedures that allow you to customize system settings for your business Syst
234. n green on red on A call is ringing on the line Green flash means a call is ringing at your extension Red flash means a call is ringing on the line but not at your extension Alternating green and red flash appears at both extensions in a joined call and at any Green flash means someone at the extension programmed on the button is calling you a _ ren eee ee long on short off Green Flutter NINE NIE ON se eee ee short on short off Red Broken Flutter Ce short on off long off Green wink means the call is on hold at your extension Red wink means the call is on hold at another extension Any one who has the line can retrieve the call A call is on exclusive hold at your extension and can only be retrieved from your extension 3 4 Learning About Telephones A Wake Up Service call is being scheduled from extension 10 green on extension connected in a conference call Wink A call on the line is on hold A call transferred to the extension programmed on the button is now returning to your phone or you are being manually signaled by the extension Fax Management only the fax extension is not answering calls may be out of paper Applies to Do Not Disturb Night Service Outgoing Call Restriction Button Privacy Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back and VMS Cover all of which require programming on a button with lights Can also apply to Account Code
235. n 30 press 3 a 3 To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item Or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Fax Machine Extensions 601 5 53 Forced Account Code Entry 307 Description This feature applies only to system phones This System Programming procedure identifies specific extensions at which users must enter an account code prior to making outside calls The account code can be used to charge telephone calls to a department or client it prints on call reports if you are using SMDR Station Message Detail Recording or a call accounting package Related Features You can use to create a list of valid account codes If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If a forced account code is valid the system provides the user access to an outside line If a forced account code is invalid the system denies the user access to an outside line to dial out the user must repeat the procedure for entering a forced account code Extensions programmed with this feature are restricted from dialing outside phone numbers on all lines at the extension including numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 until an account code is entered If a Forced Acc
236. n Calling Group 1 For touch tone phones only if your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Simultaneous Paging I 70 5 121 SMDR Record Type 608 Description This System Programming procedure allows you to specify whether all calls or outgoing calls only are to be included on call reports Call Reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report Related Features m The date and time that appear on call reports are determined by System Date 101 and System Time 103 m The call report page header prints in the Display Language 303 specified for extension 10 m If Account Code Entry optional or forced is used to enter an account code for a call for example to charge calls to specific departments or projects the account code prints on the call report If there are entries on Peed acca EIER ADI En only valid account codes and any other entered digits up to 16 print on the call report m Marked System Speed Dial Numbers appear on the call report as Fnn where nn is the Speed Dial code m Forinstructions on notifying the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page see SMDR Top Of Page 609 Considerations This feature requires special hardware For more information see Call Report
237. n To program an extension number To program an outside number PRESS left intercom LINE RINGING p 5 85 DIAL the phone Machen to 28 DIAL the extension number to ring PRESS each line button until the desired ringing option appears in the digits including the extension or display x plus the extension number Immediate ring green steady v fo 5 124 to voice signal the extension Noring green fast flutter Delayed ring starts ringing after 20 seconds green slow flashing System Features ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY p 5 4 CONFERENCE DROP p 5 30 GROUP CALLING RING PAGE p 5 60 PRESS a programmable button e PRESS a programmable button For ringing the group PRESS Feature 1 2 PRESS Feature 0 6 PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom Z DIAL a Calling Group number 1 4 DIRECT LINE PICKUP ACTIVE LINE For paging the group PRESS a programmable button p 5 33 PRESS a programmable button DIAL left intercom amp 8 PRESS left Intercom x Z DIAL a Calling Group number 1 4 DIRECT LINE PICKUP IDLE LINE PRESS a programmable button p 5 35 DIAL left intercom 8 BACKGROUND MUSIC PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 9 p 5 20 CALL FORWARDING CALL FOLLOW ME PRESS a programmable button p 5 22 PRESS Feature 1 1 GROUP HUNTING RING VOICE SIGNAL For ringing the first
238. n a system phone go to Possible Cause 6 What to do Stay on the line and wait for dial tone or try your call later m If you can make a call you may want to increase the number of touch tone receivers by adding 206 1 receiver or 400 2 receivers modules to avoid future problems Call the AT amp T Helpline m f you wait 30 seconds and still do not hear a dial tone go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 Local phone company line is faulty What to do One at a time unplug each outside line from the 206 400 or 200 module inside the control unit Then plug each line into a standard telephone and try to make a call m If the trouble appears on the standard phone try another line cord if the trouble persists report it to your local phone company m If the trouble does not appear on the standard phone the trouble is with your control unit Call the AT amp T Helpline Calls are Answered Automatically A call rings once then disappears as if it were answered Possible Cause An auxiliary device answers when it should not could occur with a fax machine voice messaging system answering machine or modem What to do Be sure the device is set to answer correctly If the device answers before it should adjust it to answer on a later ring If the device should not answer calls at all turn its auto answer feature off Refer to the device s user manual m For every auxiliary device connected to your system either set th
239. n with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 f no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no destination extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Standard Phone To forward your calls 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 1 1 3 Dial your extension number 4 Dial the number of the extension at which you want your calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 1 1 3 Dial your extension number twice 5 24 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 F11 XX XX Call Pickup I6XX Description This feature lets users answer any intercom outside or transferred call ringing at a specific extension where XX is an extension number from 10 33 This feature is useful for officemates who agree to answer each other s calls Considerations You can program a Call Pickup button on a system phone to pick up a call ringing at another specified extension with one touch Programming To program a Call Pickup button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 To specify the extension to be answered press left Intercom followed
240. nected to auxiliary equipment PARTNER Attendants voice messaging systems internal or external hotline phones or doorphones in the Night Service Group Wm A userin the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line that is assigned to that user s phone Line assignments for extensions in the Night Service group can vary from one extension to another Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v Programming To change a Night Service Group assignment 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 0 4 The display reads NS Group Extension 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 13 press 1 3 3 To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item Or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Night Service Group Extensions 504 5 103 Number of Lines 104 Description This System Programming procedure determines the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions This number does not have to match the actual number of lines connected at the control unit This feature should be used only for initial system setup Related Featu
241. ned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another extension VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY DIAL 312 p 5 147 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program anothe extension CALL WAITING DIAL 316 p 5 26 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program anothe extension DIAL 399 DIAL a source extension number System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMING TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM TR PIRE THROUGH AVAILABLE PRESS Feature 0 0 PRESS Feature 0 0 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESS System Program TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE PRESS System Program DIAL 4 and three digit procedure code Example 1 0 1 for System Date PRESS Next Procedure or Prev Proceaure PRESS Next Data or Prev Data NOTES Procedures 399 609 and 728 shown below in dashed boxes are skipped when cycling TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING PRESS Remove SYSTEM DATE p 5 126 DIAL 101 DIAL the date in MMDDYY form V SYSTEM DAY DIAL 102 DIAL 1 Sunday v 9 Thursda 2 Monday 6 Friday 3 Tuesday 7 Saturday 4 Wednesday p 5 127 SYSTEM TIME DIAL 103 DIAL the time in HHMM 24 hour military format p 5 133
242. nes to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours Related Features m Night Service affects only the extensions identified using Night Service Group Extensions 504 m Ifyou program a System Password 403 the password must be entered when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours m If you have a voice messaging system determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only depending on the status of the Night Service button at extension 10 which tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode Considerations m A Night Service button must be programmed on the system phone at extension 10 m Night Service must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not work if it is programmed on a button without lights m Auserin the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line that is assigned to that user s phone Line assignments for extensions in the Night Service group can vary from one extension to another
243. ng restrictions provided the user has access to an outside line m Emergency Phone Number List 406 defines a list of up to ten numbers that can be dialed from any extension A typical number is 911 m Marked System Speed Dial Numbers are specially identified System Speed Dial numbers which a user can dial by pressing Feature or on a standard phone followed by a three digit code m System Password 403 creates a password that can be entered at any system phone except an MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 to override dialing restrictions for the duration of a call 2 8 Programming ia Lists 407 to create lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Then use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more of the lists to an extension To override all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction 302 and Night Service with System Password 403 use Allowed Phone Number Summary Tables 2 1 and 2 2 summarize the available dialing restrictions and permissions showing how they can be combined in a variety of ways to customize an extension s dialing privileges Table 2 1 Settings that Restrict an Extension s Access to a Specific Line Type of Restrictions or Setting for Setting for m ermmssions for the Line Assignment Line Acess Restriction Extension 801 802 Can receive and place All outside lines not No access for all lines intercom inside calls
244. ng Group Extensions 502 Night Service Group Extensions 504 and Hunt Group Extensions 44505 to place the extension in any of these groups See later in this chapter for more information 605 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 or AA Extensions 607 External Hotline 4311 or Hotline 603 to identify the extension as one of these equipment types later in this chapter provides an overview of the procedures you use for setting up devices such as voice messaging systems and call reporting devices Also Chapter 4 provides detailed information and example applications for auxiliary equipment 2 4 Programming Copy Settings The recommended way to set up your system is to program one extension for each type of phone in the system then use Copy Settings 399 to program other phones of the same type For example you can program one MLS 12D phone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have MLS 12D or MLS 12 phones See Copy Settings in Chapter 5 for a list of the programmed settings that are copied Changing Settings after Installation As your business grows or changes you will probably need to change the way your system was originally programmed This section provides some examples and lists the procedures you would use to change settings after installation For specific details on a procedure refer to the procedure name in Changing the System Clock You
245. ng a power outage provided you have a standard phone connected to any of these extensions During a power failure standard phones can only make and receive calls other system features are not available The system can stay programmed for approximately four days after it stops receiving power After four days elapse all of the system s programmed settings return to the factory settings Troubleshooting 6 1 The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur possible causes for the difficulty and procedures you can follow to try to solve the problem Programming procedure names are shown in boldface type for more information on a specific procedure refer to the procedure name in Problems with System Phones System Phone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer volume control is set too low What to do Press the volume control button while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle m lf the phone rings increasingly louder the problem is solved m lf the phone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding feature is turned on What to do Check to see if Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on m f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the
246. ng machine is connected to its own extension and can cover all the lines in the system or as many lines as you assign to it You can install the answering machine on an extension by itself or combine it with a system phone or a standard phone on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Plus Communications System Installation guide Telephone optional pti Figure 4 1 Single Answering Machine To Use m Goto the machine to manually play back messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to the answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code m From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover 2 Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Immediate Ring 3 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 11502 Night Service Group Extension 2504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 4 Adjust the answering machine to answer according to your needs For example set the machine to answer on the fourth ring during the day so someone has a chance to pick up the call Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 5 Multiple Answering Machin
247. no System Password is programmed the green light is on steady and Night Service is on 2 Enter the password The green light is on steady Night Service is on To turn Night Service off 1 Press the Night Service button on extension 10 m fa System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must go on to Step 2 m f no System Password is programmed the green light goes out and Night Service is off 2 Enter the password The green light goes out Night Service is off 5 102 Night Service Button 503 Night Service Group Extensions 504 Description This System Programming procedure assigns extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is on and a call comes in all extensions in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing settings Related Features m You must use Night Service Button 503 to program the button that is used to turn Night Service on and off m If you program a System Password 403 when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Number List 406 and Marked without entering the System Password m If you have a voice messaging system lines that are assigned to the user s phones in the Night Service Group are covered by the voice messaging system depending on the status of VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Considerations m Do not include extensions con
248. not accessible In addition you cannot assign features to those buttons until the line assignments are removed The MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones can have up to four outside lines m You can assign multiple lines up to 12 to a standard phone but a single line phone can handle only one call at a time To make a call a user lifts the handset and dials 9 at the intercom dial tone the system selects the first available line based on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for the extension Alternatively the user can use Direct Line Pickup to access a specific line Valid Entries 1 Assigned v 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a line button to assign the line to that button Programming To assign lines to a specific extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 1 The display reads LineAssign Extension 2 Enter the extension number to be programmed 10 33 For example to program extension 15 press 1 5 A steady red light appears next to each line button that has a line assigned To remove all existing line assignments press Remove before selecting a line 3 Enter the line number 01 12 to be assigned For example to select line 1 press 0 1 5 82 Line Assignment 301 At this point m f you want to assign the line to the first available button with lights on the system phone press Next Data until the disp
249. ns from joining calls on a specific extension This is especially useful for answering machines fax machines modems and credit card scanners because trying to join one of these devices could interfere with its operation m Users can program Privacy onto a system phone button to allow or prevent others from joining their calls as needed m Ifa line is not assigned to a user s extension the user can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to join an active call on the line unless access to the line is restricted for that extension Considerations m You cannot put a joined call on hold m You cannot join an intercom call or a conference call at another extension W You cannot join a call on an extension that has a voice interrupt on busy call in progress m You can join a call that is being answered by the voice messaging system but only if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware If this is the case when you join the call the voice messaging system disconnects automatically so you can speak to the caller 5 76 Joining Calls How to J oin a Call System Phone A steady red light at a line button indicates a call is in progress at another extension To join a call m Press the line button next to the steady red light and lift the handset or m Lift the handset and press intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number The red and green lights alternate
250. nsion number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 140 Transfer Return Extension 306 Transfer Return Rings 105 Description This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions defines the number of times a transferred call rings before it goes to the transfer return extension Related Features m By default transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to specify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call m If you program Hunt Group Extensions 505 make sure this setting is four or more rings This setting allows the call to continue hunting to other group extensions if it is not answered by the first group extension where it rings m If an extension has VMS Cover active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than the transfer return extension Considerations m If you have a fax machine or an answering machine connected to the System set Transfer Return Rings to a number greater than the number of rings at which these devices answer Doing so prevents a call transferred to a fax or answering machine from returning before it is answered m The system does not start counting the number of rings for a transferred call to determine when it goes to the transfer return extension if it is not
251. nsions to this group A voice messaging system requires special hardware and set up procedures refer to Voice Messaging Systems in Chapter 4 and to the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system for more information Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v Programming To assign extensions to a Hunt Group 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 0 5 Atthe Group prompt enter a group number 1 7 For example to select group 1 press 1 The display reads Hunt Group 1 Extension Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 31 press 3 1 To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays At this point W To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 74 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Intercom Dial Tone 309 Description This System Programming procedure determines the type of dial tone that the system provides at an extension It may be necessary to change this setting to Machine outside line dial tone for an autodialing device such as a
252. nto the voice messaging system and receive Automated Attendant Service Line Coverage Extension 2208 identifies an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so calls can ring directly into the owner s voice mailbox when either Automatic VMS Cover 310 or VMS is on VMS Hunt Delay 506 determines when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging System You can set the system for either immediate call handling or delayed call handling The setting you select is used for both day and night operation VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only depending on the status of the Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Automatic VMS Cover 310 determines whether or not an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on lines assigned ownership are automatically covered by the voice messaging system VMS Cover Rings 117 specifies the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system identifies the extension to which a call transferred by the voice messaging system should be routed if the destination extension does not answer and does not have voice mail coverage active The transfer return extension for the voice messaging system is typic
253. nually change an extension s Privacy state users can program the Privacy feature on a button with lights Users can then press the Privacy button to activate the feature green light on or deactivate the feature green light off when they want someone to join a call at their extension If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the Privacy button to indicate that Privacy is currently active If this is the case and the Privacy button is pressed the feature is deactivated To activate Privacy again you must press the button This feature applies only to active calls Any user can retrieve a held call unless Exclusive Hold is used Considerations m f you want to be able to intercept calls routed to an auxiliary device such as an answering machine voice messaging system or PARTNER Attendant make sure Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the auxiliary equipment extension Standard phones and system phones without a programmed Privacy button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting for an extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 4 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 16 press 1 5
254. o 2 To change the hold disconnect time press Next Data until the appropriate value displays To program another line press Next Item or Prev item until the correct line number shows on the display Then follow Step 3 to change the disconnect time Repeat Step 4 for each line in the system Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 70 Hold Disconnect Time 203 Hotline 603 Description This System Programming procedure identifies an internal hotline extension and its alert extension When a user lifts the handset of the hotline phone the alert extension rings You can set up several internal hotline and alert extension arrangements The alert extension can be the same or different for one or more hotline extensions We recommend using a standard phone as the hotline phone since this feature only makes use of the phone s intercom The alert extension can be any type of phone or it can be the loudspeaker paging system so that the hotline phone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker Related Features m To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the hotline phone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the hotline extension m Set Automatic Line Selection for the hotline extension to intercom only Remove hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 4502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505
255. o Dial button for a number outside the PBX or Centrex system See Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services in Chapter 2 for more information Auto Dialing 5 13 Examples The examples below show some possible entries for an Auto Dial number in Step 4 of Programming m Outside Phone Number Enter the phone number up to 28 digits exactly as you would dial it For example to program 555 2398 press 5 5 5 2 3 e 8 Extension Number Press the left intercom button and enter the two digit extension number Include a x before the extension number to program the Auto Dial button to voice signal an extension For example to program extension 20 for voice signaling press intercom x 2 0 The display reads Intercom 20 Feature Code Enter the appropriate code For example to program a button to turn on the message light at extension 20 press Feature 0 2 2 0 When you press the programmed button the Message Light at extension 20 turns on Programming Using To program an Auto Dial button 1 FO m Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button Enter an outside phone number feature code account code or PBX Centrex feature access code or press left intercom and enter an exension number Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to pro
256. o make or answer a call to or from another extension in the system Feature labeled Feat on MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Press to change programmed settings or use system features Conf Press to add other parties to your call Transfer labeled Trans on MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Press to pass a call to another extension Hold Press to put a call on hold Spkr all models except the MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Press to turn on and off speaker and microphone if available so you can dial and have a conversation without lifting the handset The light next to this button shows when the speaker is turned on Mic MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D and MLS 12 only Press to turn the microphone on and off The light next to this button shows when the microphone is turned on Leave on to use the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature 3 2 Learning About Telephones Earpiece Volume ipod MC Cc and MDC 9000 6 an ete a or Volume Control Line Programmable Handset MIN aot Buttons 4 Handset Line Programmable Buttons e Intercom Buttons 2 MLC d MDC 9000 6 an lt MDW 9000 pvo EE I X13 Xi dx M N Intercom Buttons 2 Charge Ci Mossage ta Semen r ReIII Message Indicator Lights when someone signals you with the Message Light On feature or if you have a voice messaging system when you have a message in your mailbox On the MDW 9000 MSG appears in the hands
257. o plan and record how your PARTNER MAIL system is to be programmed PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System User s Quick Reference 585 322 701 contains basic instructions for using the PARTNER MAIL system B 4 Maintenance To order these materials call the AT amp T Customer Information Center In the continental U S 1 800 432 6600 In Canada 1 800 255 1242 Some of these materials are also available in Spanish and French For more information contact the AT amp T Customer Information Center or your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer Hardware Components Ordering additional telephones and modules accessories and replacement parts for your system is convenient Table B 1 on the next page shows where you can buy system components in the continental United States To take full advantage of your system the sources shown below can also provide you with the optional equipment you might want for your system such as AT amp T fax machines answering machines standard phones voice messaging systems modems paging systems doorphones headsets bells lights strobes music on hold systems and printers You can obtain most items from more than one source either directly from AT amp T or from authorized dealers Sources in the United States are m AT amp T Catalog Sales This source is AT amp T s national phone mail sales center in Cincinnati A Catalog Associate will place your order including AT amp T installati
258. odels 2 20 m Using Centralized Telephone Programming 2 20 m Changing Programming Type 2 23 m Using Extension Programming 2 23 2 ii Programming Overview After the system hardware is installed you can customize the system and individual telephones This chapter explains how to use programming to accomplish that There are two types of programming m System Programming allows you to customize the system to meet the needs of your business When the system is first installed it uses factory settings that reflect the most commonly used options You can change system settings as needed You can perform System Programming from either extension 10 or 11 Because an extension cannot be in programming mode and handle calls at the same time consider using extension 11 for programming Doing so gives you the ability to program without disrupting call handling by the receptionist at extension 10 m Telephone Programming allows telephones to be customized to meet individual users needs Individual telephones can be programmed either from extension 10 or 11 called Centralized Telephone Programming or from a user s extension using a system phone called Extension Programming A system display phone is required for System and Centralized Telephone Programming Make sure that the programming phone is as large as the largest phone in the system because an MLS 12D or MLS 18D cannot program an MLS 34D Similarly an MLS 12D
259. of the code If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns off Make the call if you are not already on a call To change the account code repeat Steps 2 through 4 Account Code Entry F12 5 5 To enter or change a forced account code 1 From a system phone if a password is programmed for the system you must enter it before lifting the handset See System Password 403 for more information Lift the handset or press Sp r Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on Enter an account code supplied by your system manager using one of the following methods m Dial it manually using the phone s keypad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Press an idle line button m f a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is valid or if the Forced Account Code List is empty you hear outside dial tone Go to Step 6 m f a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is not valid you are denied access to the outside line Verify the account code with your system manager then repeat this procedure starting from Step 1 Make the telephone call To change the account code while on a call Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1
260. oice interrupt on busy call At this point To talk to the originator if the green light next to the intercom button is flashing press Intercom You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button once a voice interrupt on busy call has ended To resume your conversation with the third party press the line button next to the winking green light Any party involved in a voice interrupt on busy call cannot be involved in a second voice interrupt on busy call until the first is finished Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 5 147 Valid Entries Assigned 2 Not Assigned Programming To change the Voice Interrupt On Busy setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 3 1 2 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 To assign or unassign Voice Interrupt On Busy press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Using To initiate a voice interrupt on busy call 1 Froma system phone press intercom 2 Press x plus a two digit extension number or use an Auto Dial button 3 Listen for one of the following responses m Ifyou hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply W Ifyou he
261. om some extensions or to change the button used to pick up a line at a specific extension M Line Access Restriction 302 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on specific lines E Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line will start ringing at each extension that has the line For additional information on line ringing options see Programming a Receptionist s Extension later in this chapter Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system tries to select an available line intercom or outside when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses Sp to make a call without first selecting a specific line button For extensions with standard phones set to intercom first This enables standard phones to access system features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on standard phones they hear intercom dial tone To access an outside line they must dial 9 Programming 2 3 Customizing Extensions In addition to line assignments the following procedures can be used to customize an extension Line Coverage Extension 208 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line A user at the extension can activate VMS Cover for the specified line Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension befor
262. oming call that is not answered by a user within 20 seconds also rings at the receptionist s extension Line Ringing 5 85 Programming To change the way outside lines ring at an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Line Ringing The green lights next to the line buttons on the phone show the current Line Ringing settings for all lines assigned to the extension If a line is not assigned to a button the green light next to that button is off The following ringing options can be shown by the green light next to the line button m Immediate Ring on steady m Delayed Ring tlashes slowly m No Ring flutters quickly 3 Tochange Line Ringing on any line press the line button until the button light shows the correct setting the setting for the currently selected line also appears on the display 4 Continue programming or exit programming mode 5 86 Line Ringing Loudspeaker Paging 170 Description This feature accesses the loudspeaker paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the processor module Related Features m Users can make Simultaneous Paging announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Calling Group Extensions 502 to program Calling Group 1 m You can specify the loudspeaker
263. on if you need it You can charge your order on a VISA Mastercard or American Express card The Catalog Associate can also give you sales advice and mail you the AT amp T SOURCEBOOK CATALOG of systems telephones and accessories Call 1 800 451 2100 m AT amp T Sales Offices Sales offices to serve the small business customer are located throughout the country To contact the office closest to you call 1 800 247 7000 A representative will place your order including AT amp T installation if you need it m AT amp T Authorized Dealers You can also buy most items from one of AT amp T s authorized dealers Check your local telephone directory s yellow pages for the AT amp T Authorized Dealer nearest you m AT amp T PhoneCenter Stores Your local PhoneCenter Store carries most items To locate the nearest store call 1 800 222 3111 or see your local white pages under AT amp T PhoneCenter Store m AT amp T National Parts Sales Center This national sales center located in Denver stocks replacement parts for the control unit and telephones Telephone orders can be placed by calling 1 800 222 7278 In Canada order these items from AT amp T Canada Eastern Canada and Ottawa 1 514 335 7200 Ontario 1 416 756 5236 Central and Western Canada 1 800 561 5165 Maintenance B 5 To use Table B 1 first locate the item you want A triangle A indicates where you can obtain it SOURCE U S AT amp T AT amp T AT amp T AT amp T AT amp T
264. on in the group can be picked up from any extension in the system by dialing a group pickup code Processor module This AT amp T module which is always installed in the center slot of the control unit manages the components of the control unit Programmable button A telephone button that does not have a line assigned it can be set up to dial a number or access a feature Programming See Centralized Telephone Programming Extension Programming and System Programming Programming extension An extension from which you can program the system this can be either extension 10 or 11 Proprietary device A telephone or other device that is designed to work with a specific system and requires a special interface to connect to the public telephone network For example system phones are proprietary devices that can only be used with the control unit described in this guide See also Industry standard device EEEE R RAU Remote Administration Unit An auxiliary device that lets you perform system programming from a remote location Recall A system feature that sends a timed switchhook flash to let you recall a dial tone to make another call to or access a PBX or Centrex service Use Recall only on an outside call using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call Ringer Equivalence Number REN A measure of the power it takes to ring a phone or other telecommunications device usually shown o
265. on then dialing the two digit line number Programming To program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press left intercom 8 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button and dial the two digit line number 01 12 of the idle line you want to access or press Intercom 8 and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Standard Phone 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 8 and the two digit line number 01 12 of the idle line you want to access Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I8LL 5 35 Disallowed List Assignments 405 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to four Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specified extensions Related Features You must use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create up to four lists of disallowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure Considerations When a Disallowed Phone Number List is assigned to an extension the list applies to all of the lines to which the extension has access Valid Entries 1 Assigned to extension 2 Not Assigned to
266. one You cannot enter programming mode Because there are no line buttons on standard phones users must use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line to select a specific line otherwise the system selects an idle line automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom dial tone For information aa Automatic Une Selection 36 Chapter 5 Unless Call Waiting 316 is assigned to specific standard phone extensions there is no indication of a second call and an inside caller will hear a busy tone if a standard phone is in use If Call Waiting is assigned users hear a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in for the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated Users can use the switchhook to put the first call on hold and speak to the party on the second call and to switch back and forth between the two parties Users can make a voice signaled call from a standard phone but if users try to make a voice signaled call to a standard phone it will ring because the standard phone does not have a system speaker Users cannot use the System Password Users cannot access the following system features Entry Background Music Do Not Disturb Exclusive Hold Manual Signaling Privacy Save Number Redial VMS Cover Voice Interrupt ion Busy Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back or Voice Mailbox Do not use Forced Account Code Entry with a standard phone because the phone will not be able to get dial tone and make call
267. onf The first party is now on hold Set up the call to the second party You are connected with the second party If you are adding an intercom extension to a call you must wait until the party answers Press Conf again to add the second party to the call You can now speak with the first and second parties Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add more parties Standard Phone 1 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call You are connected with the first party Press the switchhook down once rapidly The first party is now on hold You hear intercom dial tone To add an outside party dial 9 plus the outside number If the number is busy or does not answer hang up and the first party rings back To add an inside party dial the two digit extension number If the extension is busy or does not answer press the switchhook down once rapidly and you are reconnected with the first party When the second party answers press the switchhook down once rapidly You are now connected with both parties Conference Calls 5 29 Conference Drop F06 Description This feature drops the last outside party added to a conference call without disconnecting the other parties Related Features W For instructions on setting up conference calls on system and standard phones see Conference Calls m You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conf
268. ong with the target extension Use a button with lights if you want to view the status of the target extension similar to Auto Dial buttons m You can have only one button either on the system phone or on the MLS CA24 autodialer for a target extension per extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button for intercom ringing or voice signaling The lights next to the button show calling activity see Lights in Chapter 3 for more information m If you signal an extension that has an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button programmed for your extension the green light next to that button flutters to identify your extension as the signaling extension m You can signal the target extension while you are on an outside call This does not initiate a one touch transfer m To transfer a call to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press Transfer before pressing the Manual Signaling button m A Manual Signaling button does not initiate an intercom call unless you lift the handset or press Spkr and press Intercom first m To respond to a signal the target extension must place an intercom call to the person signaling Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX 5 93 Programming To program a Manual Signaling button 1 2 3 4 5 o Using Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of
269. only assigned Cannot use a specific outside Outside line not assigned No access for that line Can only monitor call activity Outside line assigned No access for that line and pick up held calls on a specific line Can only receive calls on a Outside line assigned Incoming only for that line specific line Can only place outgoing calls Outside line may be Outgoing only for that line on a specific line assigned Table 2 2 Settings that Restrict an Extension s Dialing Once It Gets an Outside Line Type of Setting for Setting for Setting for Setting for Restrictionsor Line Line Access Outgoing Call Disallowed Permissions for Assignment Restriction Restriction Phone Number the Extension 302 401 Lists 404 Can place Outside line No restriction Local only Any local intercom and may be numbers the local calls only assigned extension should and can answer not dial any call Can place Outside line No restriction No restriction Any local and intercom local may be long distance and long assigned numbers the distance calls extension should and can answer not dial any call Ifa line is not assigned to the extension a user can use Direct Line Pickup to access the line Emergency numbers Marked System Speed Dial numbers Allowed Phone numbers and numbers dialed using the System Password override all dialing restrictions if a user has access to an outside line to place the
270. ons Considerations Using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call Whenever your PBX or Centrex documentation tells you to press the switchhook when you are on an outside call use the Recall feature instead If you are already on a call most PBX or Centrex systems require that you press the switchhook to get a new dial tone then dial a feature access code to access a specific PBX or Centrex service On a system phone press a programmed button or press Feature 0 3 to use Recall Ona standard phone first press and release the switchhook to get intercom dial tone then send a Recall signal by pressing 2 2 3 On a standard feature phone that has a Recall or Flash button first press the Recall or Flash button to get intercom dial tone then send a system Recall signal by pressing 2 o 3 You can program a Recall button on a system phone to send a Recall signal with one touch Programming To program a Recall button 15 2 3 4 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 0 3 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 114 Recall F03 Using To access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting while active on an outside line System Phone 1 2
271. ons for industry standard devices including most standard phones fax machines answering machines modems and credit card scanners Optional equipment support including doorphones loudspeaker paging systems music on hold call reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR devices PARTNER Attendant and extra alerts System Components Modular hardware design makes the system easy to install and expand 1 1 shows an example of system components Control Unit The control unit is the heart of the system it includes a backplane and a cover and it houses the system modules All system modules slide into the backplane which channels power to the system The cover slides onto the front of the backplane after all the system modules have been installed A WARNING There are no customer serviceable components inside the system modules or backplane There are hazardous voltages within that can cause severe or fatal personal injury DO NOT OPEN THE MODULES If you use music on hold to broadcast certain copyrighted music or material including songs or other material from radio broadcasts you may be required to obtain the permission of the copyright owner One way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP BMI and or similar performing rights organizations to obtain a license Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold amp system from AT amp T which does not require you to obtain Such a license AT amp T di
272. or MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Base Lights when handset is placed on the base and handset batteries are charging Spare Charge Indicator MDW 9000 Base Lights when spare battery is charging Learning About Telephones 3 3 Lights Each line button has a green light and a red light The meaning of these lights varies depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line is programmed with a system feature or is programmed for Auto Dialing an extension number Intercom Auto Dial button Auto Dial buttons for fax extensions show additional information these Fax Management buttons are described in Chapter 4 When a phone is in programming mode the lights show information about programmed settings See Chapter 2 for details Table 3 1 shows the meanings of the various light patterns for each possible button assignment Table 3 1 Light Patterns for System Phones Offf steady off you are using the line red means someone at another extension is using the line Line is idle not being used feature is on Feature is off Feature Button Intercom Auto Dial Light Pattern Line Button Button Steady On Line is in use Green means Green means Red means the extension programmed on the button is busy making or answering a call Extension programmed on the button is idle not being used Flash BEEN SS RENENESENSO long on long off Alternating Red Green Flash a red o
273. ount Code List exists then the account code must match an entry on the list for the user to get an outside line Account Code Entry provides instructions on entering forced account codes ETA SETTI TA can be entered manually or using System Speed Dial stem Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial Numbers and Auto Dialing but not Marked Numbers Pers Speed Dial Numbers Automatic Line Selection does not apply for an extension programmed with this feature the user must manually select a line after entering an account code Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry to an External Hotline 311 extension If alSystem Password 403 is required to override dialing restrictions for an extension users must enter it before entering the account code Considerations If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports See Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 for more information on call reporting For forced account code entry if a Forced Account Code List exists only valid account codes are printed on the call report Forced account codes are not required to answer incoming calls at the extensions programmed with this feature 5 54 Forced Account Code Entry 307 Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Programming To program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 7
274. ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 m Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system m Auser can turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing to send that call immediately to his or her voice mailbox See Send All Calls m Users with VMS Cover already turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox m If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the call forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system Considerations m This feature must be programmed on a button with lights m This feature does not apply to voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt on Busy calls group calls forwarded calls or transfer return calls 5 142 VMS Cover F15 Programming Using To program a VMS Cover button 1 2 3 4 5 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 1 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button to turn VMS Cover on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the lig
275. p 7 hunt through the VMS Hunt Group all the time only during Day operation Night Service is off or only during Night operation Night Service is on This feature affects only the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system Related Features m You must use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign lines to Hunt Group 7 m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 m f you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for Day Only or Night Only you must use Night Service Button 503 to program a Night Service button for extension 10 Valid Entries 1 Always v 2 Day Only 3 Night Only Programming To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 0 7 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 146 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Description This feature is available only on system phones This System Programming procedure identifies extensions that can receive voice interrupt on busy calls A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets a user the originator interrupt and speak to another user the recipient who is busy on an intercom or outside call with on
276. p Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G For example a car dealership puts all extensions for the sales staff into Calling Group 1 To let a prospective customer talk to any salesperson the receptionist simply transfers the call to the group by dialing Transfer z 1 All the phones in the group ring and the customer is connected to the first salesperson to answer Alternatively the receptionist can page the group through the speakers of their system phones by pressing Intercom x z 1 Programming Using To program a Calling Group button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Fee coc gm If you want calls to ring the group press left intercom 7 If you want calls to page the group press left intercom x z Note that buttons programmed for paging a Calling Group cannot be used to transfer a call to that Calling Group 5 Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 6 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To use when programmed on a button To ring or page the Calling Group press the programmed button first then lift the handset If you ring the group all available extensions in the Calling Group ring If you page the group your voice is heard through the speakers of all system
277. permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe System if present are connected This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION A Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement
278. press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Allowed List Assignments 408 5 7 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Description This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions as long as they have access to an outside line For example if you restrict an entire category of calls through you can permit calls to a specific number in that category by placing that number on an Allowed Phone Number List Using this procedure you can create up to four lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each Related Features m After completing this procedure you must use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign the Allowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions m Allowed Phone Number Lists override but not Restriction 302 or Night Service Button 503 with a System There are other ways of overriding restrictions see Marked 406 and for more information m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls Considerations m Each list entry can include up to 12 digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the Hold button on a
279. r 11 Overlays are provided with the system documentation Replacements can be ordered through the AT amp T Sourcebook Figure 2 3jillustrates the programming overlays 2 12 Programming MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS12D Figure 2 3 Programming Overlays for System Display Phones Programming 2 13 During System Programming the normal functions of several buttons on the display phone at extension 10 or 11 change For example the left intercom button becomes System Program the button used to enter programming mode The programming overlay identifies these buttons You use the following special buttons while programming m Next Procedure and Prev Procedure cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures You can use these buttons to select a procedure Next Item and Prev item cycle forward and backward through a procedure s parameters A parameter is typically an outside line an extension or a telephone list entry Next Data and Prev Data cycle forward and backward through the valid entries These buttons work only for fixed data such as a line or extension number They do not work for variable data such as date time password telephone numbers or doorphone assignments Remove returns the current setting to the factory setting or when using Line Assignment 301 removes lines from an extension Enter ends an entry of variable
280. r 206 module and the system must be equipped with an R3 1 or later processor module Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns off the message light at a subscriber s extension when messages in the mailbox have been deleted If a message light is inadvertently turned off at an extension that has a message in the mailbox the message light is refreshed during the voice messaging system s daily maintenance 3 a m If you use the Message Light On feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use this feature to turn the light off You can program a Message Light Off button on a system phone to turn the message light off at a specific extension with one touch Programming To program a Message Light Off button 1 2 3 4 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 1 0 Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Message Light Off F10XX 5 95 Using System Phone To turn off the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press Feature 1 0 If you programmed
281. r return extensions The transfer return extension for any extensions associated with PARTNER Attendant or voice messaging system hardware should be extension 10 or another extension with a receptionist who can assist the caller Extensions 607 is used to identify the extensions associated with PARTNER Attendant hardware and Hunt Group Extensions 8505 lis used to identify the extensions associated with voice messaging system hardware If an extension has VMS Coverlactive unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than the transfer return extension Considerations m An unanswered transferred call returns to the transfer return extension identified for the extension transferring the call not the one receiving the call m Do not designate an extension associated with PARTNER Attendant or voice messaging system hardware as the transfer return extension for any user extension m Transfer return calls do not receive voice mail coverage Valid Entries Extension transferring call v Any extension Programming To change the Transfer Return Extension for a specific extension 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 0 6 Dial the number of the originating extension Dial the number of the extension to which the call should return if it is not answered To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the exte
282. rammed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G 5 65 Group Pickup 166G Description This feature allows users at any extension in the system to answer any outside intercom or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group where G is a Pickup Group number from 1 4 In other words when a call rings at an extension that is in a Pickup Group users at any extension in the system can answer the call without knowing which extension or line is ringing and without being in the same Pickup Group The system can have up to four Pickup Groups Related Features You must use Pickup Group Extensions 501 to assign extensions to Pickup Groups Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Pickup Group m You can program a Group Pickup button on a system phone to pick up calls Examples in a Pickup Group with one touch Here are some useful applications for a Pickup Group m Put all system extensions in a Pickup Group except the boss s private extension so anyone on the system can answer a ringing call except calls to the boss Put the extensions of people who work near each other and who can hear each other s phones ring but who don t have each other s lines on their phones in a Pickup Group For example a group of typists work in a large room separated b
283. ransfer calls from your extension to the fax machine with a single touch Programming for Fax Management To program a Fax Management button first assign the fax machine extension using Fax Machine Extensions 601 See Chapter 5 for details Then program the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button For more information see Auto Dialing in Chapter 5 Using the Fax Management Button The lights next to the Fax Management button show what is happening at the fax machine see Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Fax Management Button Light Patterns Light Pattern Indicates Red broken Fax trouble The fax machine is not answering flutter If broken flutter occurs because the fax machine is out of paper refill the paper The light clears the next time the machine transmits or receives a call If the machine takes longer than four rings to answer the light shows fax trouble when the machine does answer the light changes to fax busy red steady Red steady Fax busy The fax machine is busy transmitting or receiving a call Green flash Fax calling The green flash indicates that the fax machine extension is calling you An AT amp T fax machine with the Notify feature can call you automatically after it receives a ansmission See Using the Fax Machine s Notify Feature on the next page Green flutter Fax transfer return A call you transferred to the fax machine was not answered and is returning to you
284. ransferred call that is ringing at a specific extension or at any extension in a group For more information see Call Pickup and Group Pickup m A user can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to answer calls on lines not assigned to the user s phone m A user can program the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back feature on a button with lights to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call Also see Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 m You can use Call Waiting 316 to specify standard phone extensions that can receive a call waiting tone and a second incoming call Considerations m If you are using an MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone make sure the handset is on before using the instructions in How to Answer Calls Ringing at Your Extension m There are several ways to access a line for answering calls Oneither a system phone or a standard phone lift the handset to answer a ringing call if more than one call is ringing at a system phone you get the call that has been ringing for the longest time Ona system phone press a specific line or intercom button You can also use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call by dialing intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number Ona standard phone you can use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call on a specific line at intercom dial tone dial 6 8 and the two digit line number m D
285. re enter a new list number and repeat above steps ALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS DIAL 408 p 5 7 DIAL an extension number 10 33 DIAL alist number 1 4 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next Item to assign another list To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps FORCED ACCOUNT CODE LIST DIAL 409 p 5 56 DIAL alist entry 01 99 To add entry DIAL me account code up to 6 digits PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS Next Next tem to program anothe ist entry System Speed Dial Numbers p 5 130 To program a number PRESS Featwe 0 0 to enter programming mode PRESS Feature DIAL a three digit code 600 699 DIAL the telephone number up to 28 Including special characters see To mark it to override restrictions dial x before the telephone number To program another number or to change a number repeat PRESS Feature 0 0 to exit programming mode digits page 5 124 To remove a number mode PRESS Feature code 600 699 PRESS mic DIAL the System Speed Dial number s To remove another number repeat PRESS Feature 0 0 to exit programming mode PRESS Feature 0 0 to enter programming 1 IMPORTANT Using this procedure disconnects any
286. reference materials replacement parts accessories and other compatible equipment refer to Product Ordering Information in Appendix B Support Telephone Number In the continental U S AT amp T provides a toll free customer helpline 24 hours a day Call the AT amp T Helpline at 1 800 628 2888 if you need assistance when programming or using your system Outside the continental U S contact your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer o E Contents EE S About This Guide v 2 Programming i 2 i m Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services 2 6 m System Programming Options 2 7 m Using System Programming 2 12 m Telephone Programming Options 2 16 m Using Telephone Programming 2 20 NENNEN 3 Learning About Telephones e System Telephones 1 m Standard Telephones 8 m Combination Extensions 11 m Using Telephones 12 EE SS o n LIA Contents 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment m Voice Messaging Systems T 4 i 5 Feature Reference 5 i 6 m When You Need Help 6 m Power Failure Operation 6 m Problems with System Phones 6 6 6 6 6 Troubleshooting i 3 i 4 2 m Problems with Standard Phones 4 5 7 m Other Problems with Phones m Problems with Standard Devices 6 10 m System Problems 6 10 m Problems with Combination Extensions A Specifications A 1 ne B Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information B 1 EE 0000 oS XEESSESECRCEREUUUOR0O0 A D LLTTIT
287. rent languages Considerations If SMDR is used the call report header is printed in the language specified for extension 10 Valid Entries 1 English v 2 Spanish 3 French Programming To change the Display Language setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 2 2 System Program System Program 3 2 3 The display reads Language Extension 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 11 press 1 1 The current display language displays 3 To change the display language press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To change the display language for another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Display Language 303 5 41 Distinctive Ring 308 Description This System Programming procedure determines whether calls should ring at a standard device using the system s distinctive ringing patterns different patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls or whether all calls should ring like outside calls Considerations m Change the setting to Not Active if a standard device such as a modem or answering machine does not pick up intercom or transferred calls m f distinctive ring is set to Not Active for an extension where both a system phone and a standard devic
288. res Do not use this procedure if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Line Assignment 301 jJLine Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing lines back to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Assignment 301 Considerations m You can use this feature to tell the system how many lines are actually connected at the control unit For example if some line jacks do not have lines connected use this procedure to indicate the number of jacks that actually have lines connected otherwise the line numbers associated with empty jacks would be assigned to phones as though there were actually lines attached m You can use this procedure to limit the number of lines that are automatically assigned to all extensions For example if there are ten lines connected to the control unit you can use this procedure to set the number of lines to 8 so that only the first eight lines are assigned to all system extensions You can then use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 9 and 10 to specific extensions Valid Entries 2 lines per 206 or 200 module plus 4 lines per 400 module v Programming To assign lines to the system at initial system setup 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 1 0 4 2 Dial two digits for the number of outside lines in the system 01 12 that you want to a
289. ring 3 8 6 1 Support a et Swapping extensions 2 6 IN 6 Index Switchhookflash 3 9 5 114 5 116 System clock 2 3 2 5 System Date 101 System Day 102 System Password 403 System phones buttons call handling definition 1 dial tones indicators labeling sheets 2 21 lights microphone overview ringing pattems 3 5 speaker using options overiew receptionist extension 2 17 speeddialing 2 16 Telephone usage reports 5 122 5 123 Telephones see also phones cordless System phones and Standard Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Voice interrupt on busy call description 3 7 5 14775 148 1 responding to a 5 149 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back 5 149 Voice mail 5 142 5 144 5 146 5 150 1 Voice Mailbox Transfer 5 150 Voice messaging systems 5 142 5 144 1 5 146 5 150 overview 4 24 sending calls 5 119 1 O summary of procedures 2 11 Voice signaling 3 6 5 60 5 65 Cd BS Volume controls 3 3 Ww Wake Up Service Button 115 5 151 5 154 Warranty informationJB 1 B 3 Wildcard character Wiring specifications C Z U Usage reports 5 122 1 5 123 Z300A Electromagnetic Interference EMI filter 4 3 B 6 Index IN 7 C
290. ring or voice signal the first available non busy extension in that group If a ringing call is not answered the system tries each available extension in turn until the call is answered If a voice signaled call is not answered the call does not keep hunting Also use Group Call Distribution 2206 to assign outside lines to a Hunt Group if you want outside calls to ring directly into a group Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment The following programming procedures help you manage auxiliary equipment See Chapter 4 for more information on auxiliary equipment configurations or refer to Chapter 5 for details on using the procedure m Fax Machine Extensions 2601 identifies extensions to which fax machines are connected m Music on Hold 602 activates or deactivates the MUSIC ON HOLD jack on the processor module When this jack is activated and an audio source is connected callers hear recorded music or messages while on hold Also Background Music lets users with system phones other than the MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 play the recorded material through their phone s speaker when the phone is not in use m Hotline 603 identifies internal hotline extensions so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone a predetermined extension number automatically rings External Hotline 311 identifies external hotline extensions so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone a predetermined outside phone number
291. rogram again The display reads SYSTEM PROGRAM d Press Central Tel Pogram display reads CENTRAL TEL PROG Extension 3 Dial the extension number of the telephone to be programmed Buttons on which lines are assigned for the extension light up to show the current Line Ringing settings remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 4 Atthis point you can m Use Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the telephone tries to select a line when the user picks up the handset If you want to change Automatic Line Selection for an extension you must do so immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number m VselExtension Name Display assign a user s name to the extension See Chapter 5 for the character codes Like Automatic Line Selection this procedure must be done immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number If you want to change both Automatic Line Selection and Extension Name Display first change Automatic Line Selection then press Central Tel Program and return to Step 3 redial the extension number then use a Use Line Ringing to change the ringing for an individual line 5 Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers Auto Dial numbers or system features as described in Chapter 5 To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press Mi
292. rols 3 3 Ringing Abbreviated 305 5 3 O Line 5 8515 86 Ringinadie Line Preisrence eef Selection Ringing patterns system phones 3 5 o Rings Transfer Return 105 5 144 SS O VMS Cover 117 5 144 Rotary Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Rotary dial 5 32 5 117 lines 5 32 5 135 oo y phones Index IN 5 NENNEN S SAC see Send All Calls SendAllCals 5 119 SY Set date day time Settings Copy 399 5 31 Setup initial 2 83 Sharing an extension Simultaneous Paging 5 120 T8321 SMDR see Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Record Type 4 608 5 122 SMDR TopofPage 4609 5 123 CS Speaker using volumeconro 23 F Speaker Spkr button Speakerphone nonoo e 4 2 Special dialing functions Specifications Speed dialing Auto Dial buttons 5 13 5 14 Personal Speed Da rarse System Speed Dial numbers 5 130 f 5 132 _ Standard devices answering machines ds credit card scanners fax machines MEA o E ET limitations modems 4 overview telephones 1 6 8 8 Standard phones Automatic Line Selection for call e BS M connecting 17 dialtones 3 9 ZA 4 VV dial code features feature buttons on limitations 1 7 8 10 message waiting compatibilit overiew 1 6 3 power File for use du
293. rvice Button 115 5 151 5 iv Feature Reference Overview This chapter provides reference information for programming and using system features Features are listed in alphabetical order System Programming procedures include the procedure code and three digit number in the heading dial code features include the feature code F for Feature or for Intercom plus a two or three digit code Some feature codes also include a variable XX for a two digit extension number from 10 33 LL for a two digit line number from 01 12 or G for a single digit group number Headings without codes are general call handling topics or Telephone Programming procedures If you have trouble finding a feature name in this chapter consult the index Perhaps you know the feature by a different name Each feature includes the following information if applicable m Description m Examples m Related Features m Programming m Considerations m Using m Valid Entries Y factory setting This chapter gives step by step instructions using the following conventions m Programming instructions tell you to use the Next Data button to change values for specific settings You can however enter a value using the keypad if you prefer Similarly there are different ways to exit programming mode as described in Chapter 2 lse the method with which you are most comfortable m For Telephone Programming this chapter provi
294. rvice protection during the warranty period on the control unit in case there is a major system failure you can purchase an Around the Clock service contract from your local AT amp T sales office 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through an AT amp T Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Post Warranty Repairs If you purchased your system from AT amp T and you have a post warranty service contract AT amp T service is provided under the terms of that contract To significantly reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period you can purchase a post warranty service contract from AT amp T If you do not have a contract AT amp T service is provided on a time and materials basis by calling the Helpline A contract provides to you within the applicable coverage period and response times service calls with no charge for parts and labor on covered repairs Both Business Day and Around the Clock coverages of varying lengths are available To order a post warranty service contract call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you leased your system from AT amp T Business Day service is included in your lease To upgrade to Around the Clock service call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through an AT amp
295. s Feature Phones A feature phone is a standard telephone that has feature buttons in addition to the regular 12 key dial pad For example there are feature phones that have programmable auto dial buttons last number redial buttons hold buttons and built in speakers You can use most of the system s dial code features from a feature phone and program them onto a feature phone button However there are some limitations to what these phones can do 3 10 Learning About Telephones The capabilities of a feature phone are in the phone itself For example if you store a number on a feature phone s auto dial button that number is stored in the feature phone This is different from storing a number on a system phone s Auto Dial button When you program a button on a system phone the number is actually stored in the control unit Similarly when you press a Hold button on a feature phone the call is held at the phone itself Callers will not hear the System s music on hold Other phones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line If you want to program an outside number on a feature phone s auto dial button you must add a 9 and one or more pauses if available before each outside number The 9 gets an outside line and each pause allows a few seconds to get an outside dial tone Note that the feature phone s last number redial button may not work for an outside call To redial
296. s After you finish Line Assignment you can use Line Ringing to identify when each outside line assigned to an extension should start ringing If you add a line to the system its factory setting is Immediate Ring You can use Automatic Line Selection to determine the order in which the system selects a line for an extension when the user at that extension lifts the handset or turn on the speaker to make a call If you add a line to the system it becomes the last line in the selection sequence Remove all outside lines from Hotline 603 and Doorphone 604 and 605 extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing a line make sure you restrict the line using Line Access Restriction 302 even if the line is not assigned to the extension so it cannot be accessed using Direct Line Pickup Users must have access to an outside line in order to dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Line Assignment 301 5 81 Considerations m Aline must be assigned to a button with lights If a line is assigned to a button without lights you cannot access that line nor can you program anything else on the button m On system phones assign only as many lines as that extension can use For example MLS 12D and MLS 12 phones can have up to 10 outside lines if you assign 12 lines the last two lines are assigned to buttons without lights and are
297. s Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 0 3 2 Enter a new time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press 11 4 1 5 The display reads System Time Data 1415 This time appears on system display phones as 2 15 p 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Time 103 5 133 Toll Call Prefix 402 Description This System Programming procedure indicates whether users must dial a 0 or 1 before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number This feature should be set to reflect the dialing patterns of your local telephone company Related Features This procedure affects the operation of dialing restrictions and permissions For more information see Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and Emergency Phone Number List 406 Valid Entries 1 2 0 or 1 required before Area Code and Number v 2 Area Code and Number Only Programming To change the Toll Call Prefix setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 2 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 134 Toll Call Prefix 402 Touch Tone Enable F08 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user send touch tone signa
298. s program their own extensions from their system phones See also External Hotline A standard phone that is programmed to dial a predetermined outside number when a user lifts the handset See also Hotline phone HEN F Fax Management button A system phone button with lights that is programmed with the extension number of a fax machine A user can monitor the lights next to this button to determine when the fax machine is in use available or not answering Feature phone An industry standard phone that includes programmable buttons or other built in features Forced Account Code Entry A system setting that forces users at specified extensions to enter an account code before making a call See also Account code and Forced Account Code List Forced Account Code List An optional list of account codes that the system checks when a user enters a forced account code If the forced account code entered by the user is on the list valid the user gets access to an outside line if not the user is denied access 400 module The AT amp T equipment component that has line jacks for connecting up to four outside lines to the control unit HEN G Group Call Distribution A system setting that automatically directs incoming calls on specific lines to a Hunt Group See also Hunt Group and VMS Hunt Group H Hold Reminder Tone On system phones a short beep that is generate
299. s documentation to determine the maximum digits supported You can program the Account Code Entry feature code on a button on a System phone It is recommended that you use a button with lights This button can be used for optional Account Code Entry or Forced Account Code Entry To program an Account Code Entry button 1 ao fF NM Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press Prev Item 1 2 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To enter or change an optional account code 1 From a system phone if a password is programmed for the system you must enter it before lifting the handset See System Password 403 for more information After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on Enter an account code using one of the following methods m Dial it manually using the phone s keypad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 to indicate the end
300. sclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license if required 1 2 Overview CONTROL UNIT 206 Modules Processor Module Outside Line Jacks Power Indicators LEDs Extension Jacks 206 modules only MUSIC ON HOLD i Volume Adjustment Screw MUSIC ON HOLD Jack for RCA phono plug SYSTEM PHONES MLS 34D Phone with optional MLS CA24 Intercom Autodialer Figure 1 1 Sample System Components Main Circuit Breaker Power Cord Receptacle 400 Modules PAGE Jack SMDR Jack Outside Line Jacks MDC 9000 Phone Optional Devices for the control unit AT amp T Serial Printer m PARTNER AT amp T Paging MAIL VS System Voice Messaging AT amp T Call Accounting Terminal Basic or Plus Optional Devices for extension jacks Standard PARTNER MAIL Touch Tone Voice Messaging System Answering Machine ABE OG Administration Doorphone Alert Unit Overview 1 3 System Modules The following system modules can be installed in your system m Processor Module provides the software intelligence that controls the system s features It has jacks for a music on hold audio source a loudspeaker paging system and a call reporting SMDR device such as a printer m 206E Module has jacks to connect a maximum of two outside telephone lines and six extensions to the system You can connect telephones and other telecommunications devices such as fax mach
301. se restrictions You can use any combination of these procedures to design a system that meets your needs When a user makes a call the system checks the number dialed against all of the dialing restrictions that apply to the extension making the call When the number dialed passes a restriction it goes to the next one if necessary When a number violates a restriction the call is stopped and the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal IMPORTANT While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System phones give more protection than standard phones Therefore we strongly recommend that you install system phones where restricting phone use is important Programming 2 7 Restricting Access to Outside Lines A user can access a line either by lifting the handset pressing the line button on the phone or by dialing the Direct Line Pickup feature code If you do not want a user to access a specific outside line you can use 302 to control an extension s access to a certain line whether the line is assigned to the extension or not Table 2 1 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extension s access to a specific outside line NOTE If Forced Account Code Entry 307 is programmed for an extension that extension is required to enter an account code before dialing an outside number even those on the Emergency Phone Number List 40
302. sfer or Next Item this takes the place of Steps 1 and 2 in the procedure on the previous page For an extension that has a system phone you can program x plus the extension number on the Auto Dial button so you can announce the calls when you transfer them 5 138 Transferring Calls Standard Phone m To pass a call to another extension 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone Dial the extension number or z z and a Hunt Group number or z and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing after Step 2 above If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller To make a voice signaled transfer to a system phone in Step 2 above press x plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If the
303. sing Hunt Group Extensions 505 Restricting Dialing from a Fax Machine You can use dialing restrictions to restrict calling activity on a fax machine For example you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to restrict the fax machine to local calls only For a more detailed discussion of dialing restrictions see Chapter 2 4 14 Using Auxiliary Equipment Single Fax Machine The single fax machine setup shown in Figure 4 6 is good for moderate traffic The fax machine has its own line Line A the number of which is published as the fax number The fax line can be used by other phones when all other lines are busy The fax machine is connected to its own extension extension X Fax Line A CONTROL UNIT FAX Figure 4 6 Single Fax Machine To Use The fax machine automatically answers all calls that come in on the fax line If a call comes in on another line you can transfer the call to the fax extension see Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine see Fax Management earlier in this chapter When you send a fax the system automatically selects the fax line To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select line A only Set Automatic Line Se
304. sion 29 press 2 9 4 To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis point m To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 3 and 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 112 Pickup Group Extensions 501 Privacy F07 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn Privacy on and off preventing or allowing other users to join calls at the user s extension as needed Related Procedures m f Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is Assigned for an extension that extension normally is private However if a user sometimes needs to have co workers join conversations the user can program a Privacy button to turn Privacy on and off as needed Once a Privacy button is programmed the user must use the button to turn Privacy on and off even though Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is Assigned Privacy applies to active calls any user can retrieve a held call unless the call is placed on hold with Exclusive Hold Considerations m Privacy must be programmed on a button with lights Users cannot dial the Privacy code manually or
305. sions 24 2 2 Programming Initial System Setup After the control unit is installed you set up the system using a combination of system and telephone programming procedures In this guide System Programming procedures are identified by a code and three digits Telephone Programming procedures are identified by the feature name only Use the System Planner as a guide when programming The following sections provide an overview of the procedures you use for initial system setup See Chapter 5 for more information on specific procedures Other programming procedures are optional but strongly recommended to make the most of your investment See System Programming Options and Telephone Programming Options later in this chapter for details Setting the System Clock After supplying power to the control unit use the following procedures m System Date 101 to set the month and day m System Day 102 to set the day of the week System Time 103 to set the hour and minutes Assigning Lines For initial setup only use Number of Lines 104 to specify the number of lines that will be assigned to all system extensions Then use the following procedures as needed m Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone m Line Assignment 301 to assign lines to specific extensions if the line was not assigned using the Number of Lines procedure to remove lines fr
306. site and one at the location from which the programming is to be done For more information on remote programming see the PARTNER Communications System Remote Administration Unit Installation and Use guide Programming 2 15 Telephone Programming Options System telephones are ready to use when they are installed but they can be customized to meet the needs of your business and individual users This customization is accomplished through Telephone Programming Automatic Line Selection When a user lifts the telephone s handset or presses Spkr the system chooses an idle line automatically Automatic Line Selection determines the order in which the system looks for an idle line You can set the system to look for lines in any desired order For standard phones or for any phone used mainly to call other extensions select an inside intercom line first Extension Name on Display With Extension Name Display users can assign a name up to 12 characters long to their extension Then when those users make an intercom call group call or transfer a call their name and extension number appears on the display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Line Ringing Line Ringing defines when each outside line rings at a phone For each line at an extension you can specify Immediate
307. ssign to all extensions For example dialing o 6 means that all extensions are assigned lines 1 through 6 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 104 Number of Lines 104 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions in Chapter 2 for a summary of calling restrictions Related Features m This restriction also applies to lines that a user has access to with Direct Line Pickup ldle Line To override this feature users can dial Marked and numbers from an or the Also if a 403 is defined MLS model system phone users can enter it to override restrictions m You can program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to quickly change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting See Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 for information m You can use Line Access Restriction 302 to restrict extensions from making or receiving calls on specific lines and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 sts 404 to specify telephone numbers that users cannot dial m If you program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 4307 the user at that extension must enter an Account Code before accessing an outside line This feature is not available on standard phones Considerations m While procedures t
308. stall the MLC 6 cordless telephone MLC 6 Cordless Telephone Quick Reference Display and Controls 999 506 146 contains basic instructions for using the MLC 6 cordless telephone MDW 9000 Wireless Telephone Installation 503 801 111 explains how to install the MDW 9000 wireless telephone MDW 9000 Wireless Telephone Quick Reference 503 801 110 contains basic instructions for using the MDW 9000 wireless telephone MDC 9000 Cordless Business Telephone Installation 503 801 101 explains how to install the MDC 9000 cordless telephone MDC 9000 Cordless Business Telephone Quick Reference 503 801 100 contains basic instructions for using the MDC 9000 cordless telephone PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Installation and Programming 518 322 102 provides instructions for installing programming and maintaining your PARTNER MAIL VS system PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Planning Guide and Forms 585 322 503 provides the forms needed to plan and record how your PARTNER MAIL VS system is to be programmed PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System User s Quick Reference 518 322 103 contains basic instructions for using the PARTNER MAIL VS system PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Installation and Use 585 322 101 provides instructions for installing programming and maintaining your PARTNER MAIL system PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Planning Guide and Forms 585 322 501 provides the forms needed t
309. stem searches for an idle intercom line This order can be changed however to accommodate your business needs For example a telemarketing firm with a WATS line line 5 to reduce telephone expenses would set Automatic Line Selection for all telemarketers extensions to 5 1 2 3 4 Intercom This way the WATS line would be selected first Standard Phone If a standard phone user intends to place intercom calls and access system features Automatic Line Selection for his or her extension should be set to intercom first for proper operation For example the setting for a standard phone in a lobby used for internal calling or making local calls on line 1 would be Intercom 1 Programming To program Automatic Line Selection for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Automatic Line Selection 3 Press x x 4 Press the line and or intercom buttons in the desired order For each button pressed the display reads Auto Line Select 5 To exit Automatic Line Selection press x x 6 Press Central Tel Program and enter a new extension number or exit programming mode Automatic Line Selection 5 17 Automatic VMS Cover 7310 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure automatically routes an extension
310. swer calls and tell callers to press 1 for Sales 2 for Parts 3 for Service and so on The PARTNER Attendant can be set up for immediate call handling or delayed call handling Backup for Receptionist A common use of PARTNER Attendant is as a backup for the receptionist If the receptionist cannot pick up a call within a specified number of rings PARTNER Attendant handles it This prevents calls from going unanswered Figure 4 12 shows how the PARTNER Attendant would be connected to your system PARTNER Attendant Receptionist s esk Figure 4 12 Backup for Receptionist To Use Follow the instructions packaged with the PARTNER Attendant Make sure that the unit is in backup call answering mode When callers call the main number for your company the receptionist normally picks up the call If the receptionist is busy the PARTNER Attendant answers and plays a recorded message such as Please hold for the receptionist or dial an extension number now To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the PARTNER Attendant to cover 2 Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Delayed Ring 3 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension 4 Set the PARTNER Attendant to pick up within a specific number of rings so if the receptionist does not pick up a call the PARTNER Attendant will Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 23 Voi
311. system s Automated Attendant Service you may want to adjust when the lines should ring in the group See VMS Hunt Delay 506 andj VMS Hunt Schedule 66507 for more information m If you are using a voice messaging system you have two Group Call Distribution options If you want Automated Attendant Service for some or all lines then Assign setting 1 those lines to Hunt Group 7 Jf you want calls to route directly to the voice mailbox of a specific user after four rings then choose VMS Line Cover setting 3 for those lines and assign a line owner in the voice messaging system For more information on voice messaging system options refer to the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system As an alternative to the VMS Line Cover setting you can use with VMS Cover This provides more flexibility because it lets you specify the number of times calls ring using VMS Cover Rings r 17 at the user s extension before going to the user s mailbox In addition if the user s extension has Do Not Disturb on calls on the line can go immediately to coverage Considerations m Each of the 12 outside lines can be assigned to only one Hunt Group m Ifa Hunt Group that has outside lines assigned receives an outside call and Examples all the members of that Hunt Group are busy or have Do Not Disturb active the caller hears ringing which continues until the call is answered Here are some useful applications
312. system phones are set using Automatic Line Selection to automatically select outside lines first and standard phones are set to select intercom first This means that when a user with a system phone lifts the handset the user hears outside dial tone if an outside line is available but when a user with a standard phone lifts the handset the user hears intercom dial tone If you are using an MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 make sure the handset is on before using the following instructions Also these phones have no speaker so use the handset to make a call How to Make an Outside Call System Phone T Lift the handset or press Spx The light next to the line button is steady green and you hear outside dial tone Dial the phone number On a system display phone the dialed number appears on the display If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you may also need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the system To make an outside call on a specific line 1 2 3 Press the idle line button red and green lights are both off or dial intercom 8 plus the two digit line number If desired lift the handset Dial the phone number To reserve a busy line so your phone beeps when the line becomes free this is useful when you share a line such as a WATS line with other people 1 Press the busy line button red light is on steady without lifting the handset or pressing
313. t project or client for charge back or tracking purposes Related Features m You can use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to dialing any outside number including those on the Emergency Phone Number List A forced account code must be entered at the beginning of a call however a different account code can be entered any time during the call You can use Forced Account Code Entry only for extensions with system phones m You can use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes which should be distributed to the appropriate users If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If a forced account code is valid the system provides the user access to an outside line If a forced account code is invalid the system denies the user access to an outside line to dial out the user must repeat the procedure for entering a forced account code m For faster entry of frequently used account codes you can program an account code on an Auto Dial button or as a System or Personal Speed Dial number but not as a Marked System Speed Dial number See Auto ET RE Numbers for programming instructions Considerations m When an account code is entered during a call the caller on the other end does not hear the touch tone digits dialed m f SMDR is used the account code assigned to
314. t 6 9 m Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call 6 9 Problems with Standard Devices 6 10 W Standard Device Does Not Answer 6 10 m Standard Device Does Not Dial Out Properly 6 10 m Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect 6 10 Troubleshooting When You Need Help If you have a problem with your system you may be able to solve it by following the appropriate troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter If not you can call for help in the continental U S call the Helpline at 1 800 628 2888 outside the continental U S call your AT amp T Representative or local Authorized Dealer If you call have the following information ready so that the representatives can better help you m The kind of system you have for example PARTNER Plus Release 4 0 To determine the release number look at the processor module m The number of lines and extensions in your system m The type of phone system or standard and the model number if applicable System phone model numbers are located on the upper right hand corner of the phone MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 m f you followed a troubleshooting procedure and need more help tell the representative what you did Power Failure Operation When power to the system is cut off the first line on each 206 module automatically connects to the first extension on the module This allows you to make and answer calls duri
315. t be programmed on the system phone at extension 10 m Outgoing Call Restriction must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not work if it is programmed on a button without lights m The system considers extension 10 busy while you are using the Outgoing Call Restriction button and the phone acts as if it is in System Programming mode You cannot use other features or handle calls at extension 10 until you are through using the feature m You cannot use the Outgoing Call Restriction button to change an extension s setting while extension 11 is in System Programming mode Valid Entries 12 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 2 NotAssigned v 3 2 Select button then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 5 107 Programming To program an Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 1 4 2 At this point m f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to the first available button on the system phone press Next Data until the display reads CallRstr Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Outgoing Call Restriction button assignment press Next Data until the display reads CallRstr Button 2 Not Assigned m f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to a specific button press
316. t in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation Programming To program a System Password ha Using Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 o 3 The display reads Set Password Data Enter a four digit password or press Remove to delete the existing password Select another procedure or exit programming mode Before lifting the handset or turning on the speaker at an MLS model phone press Hold J Enter the password The System Password does not appear on display phones Press an outside line button or press Intercom 8 and the two digit line number and lift the handset Dial the number The password is in effect until you hang up the phone 5 128 System Password 403 System Reset Programming Saved 728 Description This System Programming procedure resets the system while retaining the currently programmed settings Reset the system only when it fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period Considerations m Resetting the system disconnects all active calls m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly m The system reset begins immediately and takes only a few seconds m Resetting the system resets any active features at an extension to the programmed settings For example if an extension has calls forward
317. ted to the system To solve the problem either connect modems directly to the network interface jacks or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading line quality Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only A modem and a terminal allow you to dial out and connect to computer bulletin boards and other data services This setup which lets you dial out but not receive calls is shown in Figure 4 9 Note that the telephone is optional and can be used if you want the terminal to share an extension with a phone Telephone optional alt Figure 4 9 Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only To Use Follow the modem manufacturer s instructions To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X 2 Ifthe modem will only dial outside the system set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first If you also use the modem for calls within the system set Automatic Line Selection to select intercom first and include a 9 and a couple of pauses in the modem s dialing sequence for outside calls 3 Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 2502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 S
318. ted with an outside line m ntercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two dial tones lift the handset The dial tone you hear assuming the phone is set to select intercom first as recommended in this guide is an intercom dial tone To hear an outside dial tone press 9 Using the Switchhook Some of the call handling instructions in this guide direct you to rapidly press and release the switchhook Pressing the switchhook for 1 4 to 1 second sends a signal over the line called a switchhook flash However do not press the switchhook too quickly If you press the switchhook and nothing happens try again and press it a little longer NOTE If your feature phone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use the button instead of pressing the switchhook If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines your PBX or Centrex documentation may tell you to press the switchhook to access PBX or Centrex features Use the Recall feature instead see in Chapter 5 Learning About Telephones 3 9 Limitations Because standard phones do not have system line buttons feature buttons or dedicated function buttons basic call handling procedures are sometimes different from those for system telephones In addition the following actions cannot be performed at a standard teleph
319. tem phones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Programming Using To program an Exclusive Hold button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the extension number to be programmed with this feature Press Feature 0 2 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 5 Program another button for this extension or press Feature 0 a to exit programming mode While active on an outside call on a system phone Al Press the programmed button or press Feature 0 2 to put the call on Exclusive Hold The light next to the line button flutters green At all other extensions the line appears busy steady red 2 To retrieve the call press the line button on which the call is held and lift the handset or press Spkr You can pick up a call on Exclusive Hold only at the extension on which it was put on Exclusive Hold 5 48 Exclusive Hold F02 Extension Name Display Description Users can assign a name up to 12 characters long to their extension Then when that extension is used to make an intercom call group call or transferred call the name appears on the system display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transf
320. the Line prompt enter the line number to be restricted at this extension For example to restrict line 2 press o 2 The current restriction displays To change the line restriction for this extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries on the previous page At this point m To restrict another line at this extension press Next item Or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m To restrict another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 80 Line Access Restriction 302 Line Assignment 301 Description This System Programming procedure assigns the outside lines that are available at an extension The default order of line assignment to the buttons on a system phone is from left to right starting with the bottom row of line buttons To put the lines in a different order first use this procedure to remove all assigned lines then assign lines in the desired order Related Features Number of Lines 104 can be used only during initial system setup to assign a subset of lines to all extensions You can use Line Assignment to assign additional lines to specific extensions For example if five lines were assigned to all extensions and there are eight lines in the system use this procedure to assign lines 6 7 and 8 to other specific extension
321. the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes off Skip Step 2 2 If no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Standard Phone To turn off the message light 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 1 0 3 Dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off 5 96 Message Light Off F10XX Message Light On FO9XX Description This feature turns on the message light at a specified extension where XX is an extension number from 10 33 Related Features For instructions on turning off the message light see Message Light Off Considerations This feature turns on the message light on system phones and standard phones that have message lights See j Standard Telephones in Chapter 1 for a list of standard phones that have message lights For message waiting capability standard phones with message waiting lights must be connected to an R3 1 or later 206 module and the system must be equipped with an R3 1 or later processor module On a standard phone the message light flashes only when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messagin
322. the system Recall feature drops calls shorten the time Valid Entries 01 through 80 25 to 2000 msec in 25 msec increments 18 450 msec Programming To change the duration of the Recall Timer signal 1 Press Feature 2 2 System Program System Program 4 1 2 z The display reads Recall Timer 18 450 msec Enter a different Recall Timer setting by pressing Next Data or Prev Data For example to increase the Recall Timer setting to 750 msec press Prev Data until the display reads Recall Timer 30 750 msec Alternatively you can enter the setting number directly For example to set the Recall timer to 750 msec press 3 a Select another procedure or exit programming mode If you are using Recall to access PBX or Centrex features test the new Recall Timer setting m lfacallis disconnected shorten the time m If the Recall signal has no effect lengthen the time 5 116 Recall Timer Duration 107 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Description This System Programming procedure changes the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout You may need to change the length of the timeout if you have any rotary lines and are having trouble calling out on standard touch tone phones For example if users dial slowly and calls are not completed or are connected to wrong numbers lengthen the timeout Related Features Use this procedure only if the Dial Mode 201 for at
323. the system makes an intercom call to the target extension at the scheduled time If the first call is not answered or the called extension is busy the system makes a second attempt five minutes later Related Features Wake up time is based on System Time 103 If users answer a wake up call they hear Music On Hold 602 if it is active If music on hold is not active users hear silence Wake up calls ring at target extensions even if Do Not Disturb is active at the extension Wake up calls to a target extension that has Call Forwarding active ring at the extension the calls are not forwarded Wake up calls that are not answered do not go to voice mail coverage even if VMS Cover is active at the target extension Considerations m A Wake Up Service button must be programmed on the system display phone at extension 10 m Wake Up Service must be programmed on a button with lights This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights m A scheduled wake up call occurs once in a 24 hour period If you want to send a wake up call at the same time on the next day you must reschedule the call m Wake up calls ring the target extension for approximately 30 seconds or 6 rings m Wake up calls are not placed to extensions assigned as doorphones Valid Entries 12 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 Not Assigned v 3 2 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Wake Up
324. tside call to a conference if you do all callers hear the busy or ringing signal If you hear a busy signal or the party does not answer reconnect with the held party by pressing the line button Users cannot join a conference call the originator must add each party to the conference If the conference originator puts the call on hold other parties can continue to talk Other inside parties can put their extensions on hold if there are outside parties on the conference call When the originator hangs up the conference is disconnected Conference calls cannot be transferred If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a conference calling feature that lets you connect multiple callers on a single PBX or Centrex line The number of callers you can connect depends on your PBX or Centrex system For more information on such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead Outside parties may be harder to hear on a conference call than on a two party call depending on the number of parties and the outside lines connected to the system 5 28 Conference Calls Using System Phone 1 5 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call You are connected with the first party Press C
325. tton or press Feawe 1 9 If the phone is idle you hear background music If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns on 2 To adjust the volume of Background Music use the phone s volume control buttons while listening to the background music To turn Background Music off Press the programmed button or press Feature 1 9 again If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns off Background Music F19 5 21 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX Description This feature forwards all intercom transferred and outside calls from a user s extension to another system extension where XX is an extension number from 10 33 Users can activate this feature from their own extension Call Forwarding or from any other extension in the system Call Follow Me Related Features If an extension in a Hunt Group 505 activates Call Forwarding the System considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt Group If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the Call Forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system Considerations You can forward outside intercom and transferred calls but not group calls or calls to doorphone alert extensions Calls cannot be forwarded outside the system The phone at the extension from which calls are being forwarded beeps once each time a call is for
326. tween the two codes For instance if the code to activate a Centrex feature is 30 and the code to deactivate the feature is 31 store 3 o wie x 3 1 on the Auto Dial button The first time you press the Auto Dial button only the number before the stop is dialed to activate the feature When you press the button again the rest of the stored number is dialed to deactivate the feature Number Outside a PBX or Centrex System To store a number that dials out of a PBX or Centrex system include a dial out code in the Speed Dial number This entry to dial the number 201 555 4321 includes a dial out code a 1 5 second pause and a toll call prefix of 1 for direct dialing which may not be required for your dialing area 9 Haa 11 2 o 1 5 5 5 4 3 2 1 Special Dialing Functions 5 125 System Date 101 Description This System Programming procedure sets the month day and year The system displays only the month and day on display phones when the phone is idle the month day and year print on SMDR call reports Considerations Include leading zeros for single digit months or days Programming To change the System Date 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 0 1 2 Enter today s date in the form MMDDYY For example to enter May 12 1995 press 0 5 1 2 9 5 The display reads System Date Data 051295 3 Select another procedur
327. ty 24 extensions install four 206 modules This arrangement allows up to 8 lines 1 4 Overview Telephones System Telephones This guide refers to AT amp T telephones specifically designed to work with the system as system phones These include the MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 and MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 telephones System phones have several buttons in common volume control buttons and the Feature Cont Transfer and Hola buttons In addition each phone has programmable buttons that can be used for outside lines extension numbers outside phone numbers or system features Outside lines as well as some System features require buttons with status lights Programmable buttons without lines assigned to them can be programmed with numbers or features so you can use the feature or dial the number with one touch The number in each MLS and MLC model name indicates the number of programmable buttons with status lights plus two intercom buttons If the MLS model phone has a display indicated by a D in the model name users receive messages and prompts when making calls and programming More information about the display is provided in A system display phone is required for system programming It must be as large as the largest phone in the system because an MLS 12D or MLS 18D cannot program an MLS 34D Similarly an MLS 12D cannot program an MLS 18D Table 1 1 summarizes system phone
328. udspeaker paging system For touch tone phones only if your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements 5 88 Loudspeaker Paging 170 Making Calls Description A user can make a call by dialing an outside phone number or an extension number There are also several ways to speed dial a number see Related Features below Related Features You can store an outside number an intercom number or a feature code on a telephone button so users can dial the number with a single touch For information about programming and using Auto Dial numbers see Auto You can program outside numbers for a particular extension or for the entire system so that a user can dial a number by pressing Feature or ona standard phone plus a two or three digit code 80 99 for Personal Speed Dial numbers 600 699 for System Speed Dial numbers For more information see Personal Speed Dial Numbers and System Speed Dial If a user lifts the handset before pressing a line button the system automatically selects the first available outside line or the intercom The order in which the system makes a selection is determined by the Automatic Line Selection for the extension m On either a system phone or a standard phone users can also use Direct Line Pickup idle Line to access a line for making an outside call m Users can r
329. umber 10 33 For example to identify extension 10 press 1 0 3 To change the alert status press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To identify another alert extension press Next item Or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 44 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Description These System Programming procedures identify extensions to which doorphones are connected A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors You can connect up to two doorphones to the system use Doorphone 1 Extension 604 to identify the extension to which the first doorphone is connected and Doorphone 2 Extension 605 to identify the extension to which the second doorphone is connected Related Features You must use Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 to identify the extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed Each doorphone can signal any number of alert extensions To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the doorphone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the doorphone extension for the doorphone extension will be automatically set to intercom First You can use Message Light on with the doorphone for example to turn on the doorphone s light as a prearranged signal to a delivery person provided
330. unt Code This is the account code up to 16 digits assigned to the call This code is typically used for charging calls to a specific project or department Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 9 Considerations m The System Date 4101 and System Time 2103 must be set correctly to ensure accurate call reports m The call report header prints in the Display Language 303 specified for extension 10 m If a report cannot print because the printer is jammed or out of paper the system will store up to 45 records in its memory until they can be printed Additional calls will not be recorded m Inthe event of a power failure records of any calls in progress are lost m Inside intercom calls are not recorded m f you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up the call is considered complete and the record is sent to the call reporting device m Conference calls appear as two outside calls This means two records are generated on the report Output Format The following serial transmission protocol is used for SMDR records m 1200 baud m no parity m 8 data bits m 2 stop bits The call reporting feature also supports XON XOFF protocol carriage returns and line feeds Serial Printers Use a 355A adapter which converts a modular jack interface to an RS 232 25 pin connector to connect a serial printer to the processor module If you connect a printer make sure the printer can receive SMDR data in the format describ
331. up m If you have multiple fax machines in an extension Hunt Group press Transfer then Intercom z z plus the fax extension Hunt Group number When a fax machine answers hang up Using the Fax Machine s Notify Feature Some AT amp T fax machines for example models 5300 5350 9025 Plus and 9035 Plus have a feature called Notify After such a machine receives a fax call it automatically dials a number and plays a recorded message such as You have just received a fax If you need to know exactly when a fax comes in or if your fax machine is located in an isolated part of your building you can use Notify in any of the following ways m Program the fax machine to make a ringing or voice signaled intercom call to an individual extension or to a group Program the fax machine to dial x plus the extension number for a voice signaled call 7 and a group number 1 4 for a call to a Calling Group z z and a group number 1 6 for a call to a Hunt Group m Program the fax machine to turn on the message light at someone s extension by dialing 0 2 plus the extension number m Program the fax machine to dial 7 0 to make its recorded announcement over your loudspeaker paging system Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 13 For all of these examples program the fax machine extension s Automatic Line to select intercom first followed by whatever outside lines you want to assign to it If
332. use a programmed button without lights to activate this feature When Privacy is on the button light at the extension is also on indicating that others cannot join calls m Privacy can be turned on and off at any time even during a call Programming To program a Privacy button 1 2 3 4 5 Using Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program Central Tel Program Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 0 7 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button to turn Privacy on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Privacy is on Privacy F07 5 113 Recall F03 Description This feature causes the system to send a timed switchhook flash over the telephone line to recall a new dial tone or to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Related Features If users have trouble with Recall use to adjust the length of the Recall signal Your local phone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 You can press Spkr to insert a Recall signal in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number provided it is the first character in the stored number For examples see Special Dialing Functi
333. utton 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button FO m To program the button to ring the next available extension in the Hunt Group press left intercom 7 7 To program the button to voice signal the next available extension in a Hunt Group press left intercom x 7 7 5 Dial a Hunt Group number 1 7 for ringing calls 1 6 for voice signaled calls 6 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To use when programmed on a button To ring or voice signal an extension in the Hunt Group simply lift the handset or press Spkr and press the programmed button To transfer a call to an extension in the Hunt Group while on a call press the programmed button 5 64 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G To ring or voice signal a Hunt Group manually ds Lift the handset and press intercom You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial 7 z and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press x z z and a group number 1 6 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first availabl
334. ventilation and easy replacement of modules provide at least 6 15 2cm clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meters at the front and bottom of the control unit Locate in an area free of excess moisture corrosive gases dust and chemicals Electrical U S and Canada 90 130 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 prong outlet separate ground separately fused at Requirements 15 Amps Other countries 90 264 VAC fused at 10 Amps Outlet must not be controlled by an on off switch Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL 1459 A An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment A 2 Specifications Requirements for Installation of a telephone or other standard tip ring device in another building requires the Out of Building following In Range Out of Building IROB protectors to protect the control unit and device from Extensions electri
335. voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the line button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up f you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking will probably also hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the line button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller f you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MLC 6 MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller m Totransfer a call with one button touch While on a call press the Auto Dial button programmed for the extension or the Hunt Group or Calling Group button for the group to which you want to transfer the call There is no need to press Tran
336. warded unless Do Not Disturb is active Do not forward your calls to any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system At an extension that has Call Forwarding activated if multiple calls are ringing the system forwards them one at a time This means that each subsequent call is not forwarded until the previous call is finished If you press the Call Forwarding button after a call starts to ring that call will not be forwarded You can program Call Forwarding on a button on a system phone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are forwarded When the green light is on your calls are forwarded when the green light is off calls ring at your extension If the Call Forwarding feature code and optional originating and destination extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Forwarding on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Forwarding is on even if calls are forwarded to a different extension than the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Forwarding off 5 22 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX Programming Using To program a Call Forwarding button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a program
337. x Transfer button at extension 10 to enable the receptionist to transfer calls directly to extension X s and Y s mailboxes without first ringing their phones This is useful when the receptionist knows that the users at extensions X and Y are away from their desks 8 Program an Auto Dial button for the VMS hunt group intercom 2 2 z at extensions X and Y to allow the subscribers to call in for their messages with one touch Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 25 Feature Reference Contents AA Extensions 607 5 2 Abbreviated Ringing 7305 5 3 Account Code Entry F12 5 4 Allowed List Assignments 408 5 7 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 5 8 Answering Calls 5 10 Auto Dialing 5 13 Background Music F 19 5 20 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 5 22 5i Contents Group Calling Ring Page 17G 1 7G 5 60 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G 5 63 Extension Name Displa 5 49 Music On Hold 602 5 99 5ii Contents Night Service Button 503 5 101 Night Service Group Extensions 504 5 103 Number of Lines 104 5 104 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 5 105 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 5 107 System Time 103 5 133 Toll Call Prefix 402 5 134 Touch T one Enable F 08 5 135 5iii ee s sOOOOO Contents Voice Interrupt On Busy 812 5 147 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F 18 5 149 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 5 150 Wake Up Se
338. x machine extension To send a fax transmission simply lift the handset on the fax machine an outside line will be automatically selected To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to Line A B C 3 Set Line Ringing for all lines on extension X to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned 5 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 2501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 4504 or I Hunt Group Extension 505 6 Tomonitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 2601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button 4 16 Using Auxiliary Equipment Send and Receive Fax Machines If your business has high volume fax traffic you can set up two fax machines one that only sends and the other that only receives For example in Figure 4 8 fax 1 is the send machine fax 2 is the receive machine Line A is the fax line the number of which is published as the fax number If fax 2 doesn t answer line A fax 1 will Fax Line A Ext X FAX 1 Send Lines Ex Y FAX 2 Receive Figure 4 8 Send and Receive Fax Machines To Use When you send a fax an outside line will be automatically sele
339. xit programming mode Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL 5 33 Using System Phone 1 Ifyou want lift the handset 2 Press a button programmed with Direct Line Pickup Active Line then dial the two digit line number 01 12 of the line you want to pick up or join or press Intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 BDial s 5 and the two digit line number 01 12 of the line you want to pick up or join 5 34 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I8LL Description This feature allows users to access a specific outside line where LL is a line number from 01 12 when the line is not in use This feature is useful for accessing a line that is not assigned to a phone Related Features m f aline is in use users cannot access it with this feature they hear busy tone For information on accessing a ringing or held call or joining a call in progress see Direct Line Pickup Active Line m f Line Access Restriction 302 is set to No Access or In Only for a line assigned to an extension a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to access that line to place a call Considerations You can program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button on a system phone to pick up a line by pressing the butt
340. y cubicles and all of their extensions are in Pickup Group 1 When a typist leaves the room and the typist s phone rings anyone else in the system who can hear the call ring can pick it up simply by dialing the Pickup Group code for that group Intercom 6 8 1 Programming To program a Pickup Group button 1 o a A C PD Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left Intercom 6 6 Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 66 Group Pickup I66G Using System Phone To use Group Pickup when programmed on a button press the programmed button To use manually 1 Liftthe handset and press intercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial e 6 and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Standard Phone To use Group Pickup 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial e 6 and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Group Pickup leopG 5 67 Hold Description This section explains how to place and retrieve calls on hold using either the Hold button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone Users can make and receive other calls on another lin
341. ypad is recommended for use as the external hotline You can identify several extensions as external hotline extensions You should not assign an external hotline to extensions 10 16 22 and 28 to keep them available for power failure use External Hotline 311 5 51 Valid Entries Extensions 11 15 17 21 23 27 and 29 33 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Programming To identify an external hotline extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 1 1 Atthe Extension prompt enter the external hotline extension number see Valid Entries on the previous page For example to program extension 30 as the external hotline press 3 a To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode To program the external hotline phone number as Personal Speed Dial code 80 1 D TP Using Press Feature 0 0 0 0 Central Tel Program Dial the extension number of the external hotline Press Feature 8 0 Enter the external hotline phone number exactly as you would dial it Continue programming or exit programming mode Lift the handset of the external hotline After approximately two seconds the programmed

Partner Plus R4 Installation Programming and Use

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents